module 5 planning of the english language teaching-learning process
module 5 planning of the english language teaching-learning process
module 5 planning of the english language teaching-learning process
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE<br />
LOJA<br />
AREA DE LA EDUCACIÓN EL ARTE Y LA<br />
COMUNICACIÓN<br />
ENGLISH LANGUAGE CAREER<br />
MODULE 5<br />
PLANNING OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE<br />
TEACHING-LEARNING PROCESS<br />
MODULE COORDINATOR:<br />
Mg.Sc. Paola Moreno O.<br />
Lic. Sandra J. Ochoa de Maldonado.<br />
WORKSHOPS:<br />
Syntactic Analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language by<br />
Verónica Richtarcikova<br />
Practice <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Native Speech by<br />
Renata Boguckaite<br />
ACADEMIC YEAR: SEPTEMBER 2010- FEBRUARY 2011<br />
LOJA-ECUADOR
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
A. PRESENTATION<br />
MODULE 5 PLANNING OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE TEACHING LEARNING<br />
PROCESS, Component <strong>of</strong> long tern <strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> career, has as<br />
aims and objectives <strong>of</strong> developing in which methods, techniques as methodological<br />
strategies must be applied during <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong>. It focused on <strong>the</strong><br />
training based on a <strong>the</strong>oretical, research and practical outline, which will be used as a<br />
foundation to suggest new ideas in order to face, change and improve <strong>the</strong> problem<br />
statement <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir pr<strong>of</strong>essional practice.<br />
It <strong>of</strong>fers a specialized training based on a <strong>the</strong>oretical, practical and research frame, <strong>the</strong><br />
same that will be used as a base to bring closer to <strong>the</strong> reality and propose alternatives<br />
<strong>of</strong> bettering <strong>the</strong> problem statement <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir pr<strong>of</strong>essional practice.<br />
The <strong>module</strong> in its programming includes <strong>process</strong>es <strong>of</strong> study and research. The<br />
formative <strong>process</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong> implies <strong>the</strong> development <strong>of</strong> three stages:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The first stage.<br />
Identification <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> problem statement about Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language<br />
Teaching-Learning Process, in <strong>the</strong> different educational establishments <strong>of</strong> Loja<br />
city.<br />
The second stage.<br />
Critical Analysis on Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language and contrasting <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>oretical frame to <strong>the</strong> reality observed.<br />
The third stage.<br />
Definition and alternatives <strong>of</strong> solution about Planning, which may contribute to<br />
<strong>the</strong> improvement <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional practice.<br />
With <strong>the</strong> development <strong>of</strong> each one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> stages and its activities, <strong>the</strong> students will be<br />
able to analyze and interpret in a critical way <strong>the</strong> tangible reality and propose<br />
alternatives <strong>of</strong> improvement <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> problem statement researched.<br />
B. PROBLEM DESCRIPTION<br />
Planning stage about <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> is an important task that <strong>the</strong><br />
teachers <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language carry out daily, so that it is essential that <strong>the</strong>y master<br />
it, since it is not being used appropriately, due to some problems that <strong>the</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essionals<br />
<strong>of</strong> this specialization face, like:<br />
The lack <strong>of</strong> management <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson <strong>planning</strong> designing hinders <strong>the</strong> development <strong>of</strong><br />
Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 2
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
interactive classes in order to keep students motivated and <strong>the</strong>refore gets behind <strong>the</strong><br />
improvement <strong>of</strong> four basic linguistic skills <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong>, and as a limited<br />
result, it influences in <strong>the</strong> methodology that <strong>the</strong> teachers may<br />
apply in <strong>the</strong>ir classes, considering <strong>the</strong> textbook as <strong>the</strong> single instrument to teach.<br />
The <strong>planning</strong> stage is bounded up with methodology, and some English teachers lack<br />
<strong>of</strong> upgraded methodological knowledge, that´s why <strong>the</strong>y keep applying <strong>the</strong> traditional<br />
method, in which <strong>the</strong> teacher is <strong>the</strong> unique active person in <strong>the</strong> classroom, and<br />
students become in just listeners during <strong>the</strong> whole <strong>process</strong>, this noninvolvement <strong>of</strong><br />
students holds down <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong>.<br />
C. TRANSFORMATION OBJECT<br />
The <strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />
educational establishments, in most cases is done in a conventional way, this situation<br />
is caused by <strong>the</strong> lack <strong>of</strong> knowledge that teachers have in related aspects with <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> practice, by <strong>the</strong> ignorance <strong>of</strong> elements <strong>of</strong> macro, meso and micro<br />
<strong>planning</strong>. The traditional system has promoted in <strong>the</strong> students <strong>the</strong> dismotivation and<br />
insufficient <strong>learning</strong> in <strong>the</strong> development <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> four basic linguistics skills. Therefore <strong>the</strong><br />
future teachers <strong>of</strong> English have to dispose <strong>of</strong> knowledge about <strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong><br />
<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> to guide and organize <strong>the</strong> <strong>learning</strong> group work and have a technical<br />
and conceptual mastery about English <strong>language</strong>.<br />
D. OBJECTIVES<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
To analyze <strong>the</strong> macro, meso and micro <strong>planning</strong><br />
To distinguish <strong>the</strong> problem statement <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>learning</strong><br />
<strong>process</strong>.<br />
To contrast <strong>the</strong> obtained information with <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>oretical frame.<br />
To establish alternatives to improve <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
English <strong>language</strong>.<br />
E. PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Use <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> to communicate inside and outside <strong>the</strong> classroom<br />
Communicate with native speakers about various <strong>the</strong>mes.<br />
Express personal points <strong>of</strong> view as well as feeling by writing.<br />
Design meso and micro <strong>planning</strong> formats by including methodologies,<br />
strategies and techniques to achieve objectives.<br />
Elaborate didactic material<br />
Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 3
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
F. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE<br />
Students will be able to understand and comprehend <strong>the</strong> importance <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>planning</strong> as <strong>the</strong> procedure <strong>of</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> by managing <strong>the</strong> literature as well as <strong>the</strong><br />
use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> to communicate and interact. Moreover students will be<br />
aware <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> need to face real problems about it and get involved with <strong>the</strong> need<br />
<strong>of</strong> improvement through <strong>the</strong>ir contribution.<br />
G. RESEARCH PROCESS DESCRIPTION<br />
The research <strong>process</strong> will be done through three stages:<br />
Stage 1<br />
Identification <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> problem statement related to <strong>the</strong> English Language <strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />
different educational establishments <strong>of</strong> Loja city.<br />
Stage 2<br />
Critical analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> and contrasting to <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>oretical<br />
frame to <strong>the</strong> reality observed.<br />
Stage 3<br />
Writing about <strong>the</strong> alternatives <strong>of</strong> solution about <strong>planning</strong> which may contribute to <strong>the</strong><br />
improvement <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional practice.<br />
H. THEORETICAL FRAME<br />
CONTENTS: FIRST STAGE<br />
Interesting lives ( respect, self-stem)<br />
Personal tastes ( honesty, liberty)<br />
World cultures ( solidarity, tolerance)<br />
Socializing ( tolerance, liberty)<br />
Código de la Niñez y adolescencia<br />
Planning<br />
Elements <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong><br />
Planning and preparing a lesson or sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons<br />
Identifying and selecting aims<br />
Identifying <strong>the</strong> different components a lesson<br />
Presentation techniques and introductory activities<br />
Practice activities and task for <strong>language</strong> and skills development<br />
Choosing assessment activities<br />
Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 4
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
CONTENTS: SECOND STAGE<br />
Law and order ( justice, respect, honesty)<br />
Strange Events ( sincerity, solidarity)<br />
Problem Solving ( punctuality, responsibility, solidarity)<br />
Behavior ( respect, sincerity)<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong> resources and materials<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> course book materials<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials and activities<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> aids<br />
Managing <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong><br />
Identifying <strong>the</strong> functions <strong>of</strong> learner’s <strong>language</strong><br />
Categorizing learners' mistakes<br />
CONTENTS: THIRD STAGE<br />
Material World ( humility, honesty, responsibility)<br />
Fame ( responsibility, punctuality)<br />
Trends ( respect, responsibility)<br />
Careers ( liberty, justice)<br />
Classroom management.<br />
Teacher roles<br />
Grouping learners<br />
Correcting learns<br />
Giving feedback<br />
Elaboration <strong>of</strong> Didactic material<br />
I. TEACHING ASSISTANCE AND ACTIVITES RELATING WITH THE<br />
COMMUNITY<br />
In order to contribute with <strong>the</strong> community, students will do internship in some<br />
schools outskirts <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> city. Students are going to work in <strong>the</strong> unit and lesson<br />
<strong>planning</strong> and carry <strong>the</strong>m out during it. Moreover <strong>the</strong>y will be in charge <strong>of</strong><br />
pr<strong>of</strong>essional improvement workshops which will train teachers from those<br />
schools to manage better <strong>the</strong>ir pr<strong>of</strong>essional styles.<br />
J. METHODOLOGY<br />
The methodology will be developed through:<br />
<br />
<br />
Academic work guide for each stage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong>.<br />
The work will be orientated towards individual and group reading <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>oretical, methodological and technological bases selected for <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong>,<br />
that permit <strong>the</strong> interactive participation and interpret, understand, explain and<br />
evaluate research, requiring for that analyze, syn<strong>the</strong>size, and elaborate graphic<br />
organizers that contribute to socialize <strong>the</strong> content, to elaborate accrediting<br />
products and sustain works in each stage.<br />
Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 5
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The development <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> research <strong>process</strong> by means <strong>of</strong> a permanent tutoring <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> coordinator <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong>.<br />
To improve <strong>the</strong>ir level <strong>of</strong> <strong>learning</strong>, <strong>the</strong> students will use information on <strong>the</strong><br />
internet, laboratory practice and practice with native speakers.<br />
The workshops and seminaries will have a didactic instrumentation for <strong>the</strong><br />
integration and interdisciplinary work. Meaningful <strong>learning</strong>, <strong>learning</strong> strategies<br />
and <strong>the</strong> practice <strong>of</strong> values will be emphasized.<br />
The activities <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong> will be carried out in present modality, from Monday<br />
through Friday from 16:00 to 21:00 hours.<br />
Stage 1<br />
For Identify <strong>the</strong> problem statement related to <strong>the</strong> English Language <strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />
different educational establishments <strong>of</strong> Loja city, <strong>the</strong> following activities will be carried<br />
out:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Stage 2<br />
Study and revision <strong>of</strong> basic bibliography<br />
Application <strong>of</strong> a survey to determine <strong>the</strong> way <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong>, executing and<br />
evaluating <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> in<br />
secondary level establishment<br />
Individual and group work<br />
Individual and group exposition<br />
Plenary<br />
For Critical analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> and contrasting to <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>oretical frame to <strong>the</strong> reality observed, <strong>the</strong> following activities will be carried out:<br />
Systematization <strong>of</strong> information<br />
Analysis and discussion <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> obtained results<br />
Application <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>oretical frame in <strong>the</strong> construction <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
obtained information<br />
Presentation and exposition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> written reports<br />
Stage 3<br />
For Definition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> alternatives <strong>of</strong> solution about <strong>planning</strong>, which may contribute to <strong>the</strong><br />
improvement <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional practice, <strong>the</strong> following activities will be carried out:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Elaboration <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> proposal based on <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>oretical frames studied and<br />
analyzed.<br />
Presentation and support <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> final report that contain <strong>the</strong> three moments.<br />
Analysis and discussion about <strong>the</strong> present work.<br />
k. TIMING AND CREDITS<br />
• First Stage<br />
From Sep 15th to Oct 29th<br />
160 Hours<br />
10 Credits<br />
Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 6
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
• Second Stage<br />
From Nov 3rd to Dec 17th<br />
160 Hours<br />
10 Credits<br />
• Third Stage<br />
Jan 3rd to Feb 11th 2011<br />
160 Hours<br />
10 Credits<br />
l. ACCREDITING PRODUCT<br />
In <strong>the</strong> first stage, <strong>the</strong> document that contains <strong>the</strong> characterization <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> problem<br />
statement about Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language Teaching–Learning Process to<br />
develop <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> will be presented.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> second stage, <strong>the</strong> document containing a critical analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> problems <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> will be analyzed.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> third stage <strong>the</strong> document in which <strong>the</strong> syn<strong>the</strong>sis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> first two stages and<br />
alternative proposal to solve this problem will be presented and exposed.<br />
M. EVALUATION, GRADING AND ACCREDITING<br />
THE EVALUATION<br />
It will be permanent, through methodological strategies that allow <strong>the</strong> critical analysis <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> academic <strong>process</strong> to be developed to reorient <strong>the</strong> activities <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong>, tutoring<br />
<strong>the</strong> research <strong>process</strong> and feedback <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong>.<br />
ACCREDITATING<br />
To accredit <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong> <strong>the</strong> following parameters will be taken into account:<br />
a) Research 40% 4<br />
b) English 40% 4<br />
c) Support 20% 2<br />
.......... ......<br />
100% 10 points<br />
GRADING<br />
The scoring will consist <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> sum <strong>of</strong> all <strong>the</strong> aspects mentioned earlier to 10 points,<br />
which will allow <strong>the</strong> approval or failing according to <strong>the</strong> General Regulation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
University.<br />
Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 7
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
N. PROFESSOR´S STAFF<br />
Mg. Sc. Paola Moreno O.<br />
Dra. Sandra J. Ochoa de Maldonado.<br />
Verónica Richtarcikova<br />
Jamie Senescall<br />
O. BIBLIOGRAFÍA<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
BROWN H. Douglas. Teaching by principles. Edit Longman. Second edition<br />
2001<br />
RICHARDS, Jack and RODGERS, Theodore. Approaches and Methods in<br />
Language Teaching.<br />
HARMER, Jeremy. How to teach English. Edit Longman. First Published<br />
1998<br />
LINDSAY, Paul. Teaching English Worldwide. 2000 Alta Book Center<br />
Publishers<br />
SPRATT, Mary and elt. The <strong>teaching</strong> Knowledge Test. Cambridge<br />
University. First Published 2005<br />
RICHARDS, Jack, Strategic Reading 1. Cambridge University. Published<br />
2003<br />
OCEANO, Manual de la Educación<br />
11. WORKSHOPS<br />
Didactic Material (3 credits)<br />
Objective<br />
Elaborate didactic material that supports <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> for <strong>the</strong><br />
different levels.<br />
References<br />
Flannelboard, magnetboard and adhesive plastic.<br />
The wallpictures and wallposters<br />
Picture flash cards.<br />
Word flash cards<br />
Au<strong>the</strong>ntic printed materials.<br />
Syntactic Analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language (3 credits)<br />
Objective<br />
Involve students to analyze <strong>the</strong> phonetics and morphological structure <strong>of</strong><br />
English <strong>language</strong>.<br />
Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 8
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
<br />
Understanding <strong>the</strong> Word combination in a structure, phrase, clause and<br />
sentences.<br />
Reference<br />
Nominal Nouns and phrasal verbs<br />
Basic patterns<br />
Classification ways<br />
Parts <strong>of</strong> speech (nouns, verbs, adjectives and Adverb.)<br />
Modifiers.<br />
Practice <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Native Speech IV (3 credits)<br />
Objectives<br />
To encourage students to <strong>the</strong> practice <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> in real situations<br />
with native speakers.<br />
To train students in <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> in a intermediate level with<br />
<strong>the</strong> purpose to keep conversations with native speakers.<br />
References<br />
• Application <strong>of</strong> future and imperative expressions in dialogues<br />
• Delivery and reception <strong>of</strong> messages.<br />
Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 9
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
P. MATRIX OF THE MODULE<br />
PERÍOD<br />
RESEARCH<br />
PROCESS<br />
RESEARCH<br />
STRATEGIES<br />
THEORETICAL<br />
REFERENCES<br />
ACADÉMIC<br />
STRATEGIES<br />
PRACTICAL<br />
ACTIVITIES<br />
EVALUATION/GRADIN<br />
ACREDITING<br />
Sep<br />
13/14<br />
Information <strong>of</strong> general<br />
aspects related to <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>module</strong><br />
Starting <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong><br />
Introducing<br />
techniques<br />
General information<br />
<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong>.<br />
Agreements /<br />
commitments<br />
Sep.15<br />
Oct. 29<br />
2010<br />
FIRST STAGE<br />
Identification <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> problem<br />
statement related<br />
to <strong>the</strong> English<br />
Language<br />
<strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />
different<br />
educational<br />
establishments <strong>of</strong><br />
Loja city.<br />
Analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
document.<br />
Study <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
information related<br />
to <strong>the</strong> research<br />
<strong>the</strong>me.<br />
Organization and<br />
systematization <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> information.<br />
Código de la niñez y<br />
adolescencia<br />
Planning<br />
Elements <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong><br />
Planning and<br />
preparing a lesson or<br />
sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons<br />
Identifying and<br />
selecting aims<br />
Identifying <strong>the</strong> different<br />
components a lesson<br />
Presentation<br />
techniques and<br />
introductory activities<br />
Practice activities and<br />
task for <strong>language</strong> and<br />
skills development<br />
Choosing assessment<br />
activities<br />
Scanning and<br />
skimming strategy.<br />
Pre-instructional<br />
strategies<br />
Learning objectives.<br />
Motivating activities<br />
Problems<br />
Co-instructional<br />
Pair/group work<br />
Illustrations.<br />
Brainstorm<br />
Reports<br />
Summaries<br />
Presentations<br />
Post-instructional<br />
Graphic organizers<br />
Review and recycling<br />
Editing<br />
Round table<br />
Build up a graphic<br />
organizer.<br />
Beginning Activities<br />
Warmers.<br />
Lead-ins.<br />
Development<br />
activities.<br />
Presentations.<br />
Build up <strong>the</strong> problem<br />
statements.<br />
Definition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
problem<br />
Formulate <strong>learning</strong><br />
objectives.<br />
Ending Activities<br />
Explanations <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
tasks individual /<br />
group<br />
Slide Presentations<br />
Assignments<br />
Oral quizzes<br />
Test<br />
Presentations<br />
Mind maps<br />
English <strong>language</strong> skills<br />
performance<br />
Conceptual maps<br />
Role play<br />
Dramatizations<br />
Reports<br />
Defined problem<br />
Total number <strong>of</strong> hours: first stage 160 hours (10 credits)<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 10
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
PERÍOD<br />
RESEARCH<br />
PROCESS<br />
RESEARCH<br />
STRATEGIES<br />
THEORETICAL<br />
REFERENCES<br />
ACADÉMIC<br />
STRATEGIES<br />
PRACTICAL<br />
ACTIVITIES<br />
EVALUATION/GRADIN<br />
ACREDITING<br />
Nov. 3<br />
Dec. 17<br />
2010<br />
SECOND STAGE<br />
Critical analysis <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
English <strong>language</strong><br />
and contrasting to<br />
<strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>oretical<br />
frame to <strong>the</strong><br />
reality observed<br />
Analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
document.<br />
Study <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
information related<br />
to <strong>the</strong> research<br />
<strong>the</strong>me.<br />
Organization and<br />
systematization <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> information.<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong><br />
resources and<br />
materials.<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> course book<br />
materials.<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong><br />
supplementary<br />
materials and<br />
activities.<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>teaching</strong> aids<br />
Managing <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong><br />
<strong>process</strong><br />
Identifying <strong>the</strong><br />
functions <strong>of</strong> learner’s<br />
<strong>language</strong><br />
Categorizing learners'<br />
mistakes<br />
Pre-instructional<br />
strategies<br />
Learning objectives.<br />
Motivating activities<br />
Problems<br />
Co-instructional<br />
Pair/group work<br />
Illustrations.<br />
Brainstorm<br />
Reports<br />
Summaries<br />
Presentations<br />
Post-instructional<br />
Graphic organizers<br />
Review and recycling<br />
Editing<br />
Round table<br />
.<br />
Beginning Activities<br />
Warmers.<br />
Lead-ins.<br />
Development<br />
activities.<br />
Presentations.<br />
Build up <strong>the</strong> problem<br />
statements.<br />
Definition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
problem<br />
Formulate <strong>learning</strong><br />
objectives.<br />
Ending Activities<br />
Explanations <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
tasks individual /<br />
group<br />
Assignments<br />
Oral quizzes<br />
Test<br />
Presentations<br />
Mind maps<br />
English <strong>language</strong> skills<br />
performance<br />
Conceptual maps<br />
Role play<br />
Dramatizations<br />
Report <strong>of</strong> logical<br />
analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
problem.<br />
Total number <strong>of</strong> hours: first stage 160 hours (10 credits)<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 11
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
PERÍOD<br />
RESEARCH<br />
PROCESS<br />
RESEARCH<br />
STRATEGIES<br />
THEORETICAL<br />
REFERENCES<br />
ACADÉMIC<br />
STRATEGIES<br />
PRACTICAL<br />
ACTIVITIES<br />
EVALUATION/GRADIN<br />
ACREDITING<br />
Jan. 3<br />
Feb. 11<br />
2011<br />
THIRD STAGE<br />
Definition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
alternatives <strong>of</strong><br />
solution about<br />
<strong>planning</strong>, which<br />
may contribute to<br />
<strong>the</strong> improvement<br />
<strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional<br />
practice.<br />
Analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
document.<br />
Study <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
information related<br />
to <strong>the</strong> research<br />
<strong>the</strong>me.<br />
Organization and<br />
systematization <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> information.<br />
Classroom<br />
management.<br />
Teacher roles<br />
Grouping learners<br />
Correcting learns<br />
Giving feedback<br />
Elaboration <strong>of</strong> Didactic<br />
material<br />
Pre-instructional<br />
strategies<br />
Learning objectives.<br />
Motivating activities<br />
Problems<br />
Co-instructional<br />
Pair/group work<br />
Illustrations.<br />
Brainstorm<br />
Reports<br />
Summaries<br />
Presentations<br />
Beginning Activities<br />
Warmers.<br />
Lead-ins.<br />
Development<br />
activities.<br />
Presentations.<br />
Build up <strong>the</strong> problem<br />
statements.<br />
Definition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
problem<br />
Formulate <strong>learning</strong><br />
objectives.<br />
Assignments<br />
Oral quizzes<br />
Test<br />
Presentations<br />
Mind maps<br />
English <strong>language</strong> skills<br />
performance<br />
Conceptual maps<br />
Role play<br />
Dramatizations<br />
Execution <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
lesson plan<br />
Reports<br />
Alternatives <strong>of</strong> solution<br />
to <strong>the</strong> problem<br />
Post-instructional<br />
Ending Activities<br />
Graphic organizers<br />
Review and recycling<br />
Editing<br />
Round table<br />
Explanations <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
tasks individual /<br />
group<br />
Total number <strong>of</strong> hours: first stage 160 hours (10 credits)<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 12
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
First stage<br />
Contents<br />
• Código de la Niñez y adolescencia<br />
• Planning<br />
• Elements <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong><br />
• Planning and preparing a lesson or sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons<br />
• Identifying and selecting aims<br />
• Identifying <strong>the</strong> different components a lesson<br />
• Presentation techniques and introductory activities<br />
• Practice activities and task for <strong>language</strong> and skills developent<br />
• Choosing assessment activities<br />
• LOS NIÑOS, NIÑAS Y ADOLESCENTES COMO SUJETOS DE<br />
DERECHOS<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 13
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
TITULO I<br />
DEFINICIONES<br />
Art. 1.- Finalidad.- Este Código dispone sobre la protección integral que<br />
el Estado, la sociedad y la familia deben garantizar a todos los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes que viven en el Ecuador, con el fin de lograr su desarrollo<br />
integral y el disfrute pleno de sus derechos, en un marco de libertad, dignidad<br />
y equidad.<br />
Para este efecto, regula el goce y ejercicio de los derechos, deberes y<br />
responsabilidades de los niños, niñas y adolescentes y los medios para<br />
hacerlos efectivos, garantizarlos y protegerlos, conforme al principio del interés<br />
superior de la niñez y adolescencia y a la doctrina de protección integral.<br />
Art. 2. - Sujetos protegidos.- Las normas del presente Código son<br />
aplicables a todo ser humano, desde su concepción hasta que cumpla<br />
dieciocho años de edad. Por excepción, protege a personas que han cumplido<br />
dicha edad, en los casos expresamente contemplados en este Código.<br />
Art. 3. - Supletoriedad. - En lo no previsto expresamente por este<br />
Código se aplicarán las demás normas del ordenamiento jurídico interno, que<br />
no contradigan los principios que se reconocen en este Código y sean más<br />
favorables para la vigencia de los derechos de la niñez y adolescencia.<br />
Art. 4. - Definición de niño, niña y adolescente.- Niño o niña es la<br />
persona que no ha cumplido doce años de edad. Adolescente es la persona<br />
de ambos sexos entre doce y dieciocho años de edad.<br />
Art. 5.- Presunción de edad.- Cuando exista duda sobre la edad de<br />
una persona, se presumirá que es niño o niña antes que adolescente; y que es<br />
adolescente, antes que mayor de dieciocho años.<br />
Art. 6.- Igualdad y no discriminación.- Todos los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes son iguales ante la ley y no serán discriminados por causa de su<br />
nacimiento, nacionalidad, edad, sexo, etnia; color, origen social, idioma,<br />
religión, filiación, opinión política, situación económica, orientación sexual,<br />
estado de salud, discapacidad o diversidad cultural o cualquier otra condición<br />
propia o de sus progenitores, representantes o familiares.<br />
El Estado adoptará las medidas necesarias para eliminar toda forma de<br />
discriminación.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 14
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Art. 7.- Niños, niñas y adolescentes, indígenas y afroecuatorianos.-<br />
La ley reconoce y garantiza el derecho de los niños, niñas y adolescentes de<br />
nacionalidades indígenas y afroecuatorianos, a desarrollarse de acuerdo a su<br />
cultura y en un marco de interculturalidad, conforme a lo dispuesto en la<br />
Constitución Política de la República, siempre que las prácticas culturales no<br />
conculquen sus derechos.<br />
Art. 8.- Corresponsabilidad del Estado, la sociedad y la familia.- Es<br />
deber del Estado, la sociedad y la familia, dentro de sus respectivos ámbitos,<br />
adoptar las medidas políticas, administrativas, económicas, legislativas,<br />
sociales y jurídicas que sean necesarias para la plena vigencia, ejercicio<br />
efectivo, garantía, protección y exigibilidad de la totalidad de los derechos de<br />
niños; niñas y adolescentes.<br />
El Estado y la sociedad formularán y aplicarán políticas públicas sociales y<br />
económicas; y destinarán recursos económicos suficientes, en forma estable,<br />
permanente y oportuna.<br />
Art. 9.- Función básica de la familia.- La ley reconoce y protege a la<br />
familia como el espacio natural y fundamental para el desarrollo integral del<br />
niño, niña y adolescente.<br />
Corresponde prioritariamente al padre y a la madre, la responsabilidad<br />
compartida del respeto, protección y cuidado de los hijos y la promoción,<br />
respeto y exigibilidad de sus derechos.<br />
Art. 10.- Deber del Estado frente a la familia.- El Estado tiene el deber<br />
prioritario de definir y ejecutar políticas, planes y programas que apoyen a la<br />
familia para cumplir con las responsabilidades especificadas en el artículo<br />
anterior.<br />
Art. 11.- El interés superior del niño.- El interés superior del niño es un<br />
principio que está orientado a satisfacer el ejercicio efectivo del conjunto de los<br />
derechos de los niños, niñas y adolescentes; e impone a todas las autoridades<br />
administrativas y judiciales y a las instituciones públicas y privadas, el deber<br />
de ajustar sus decisiones y acciones para su cumplimiento.<br />
Para apreciar el interés superior se considerará la necesidad de mantener un<br />
justo equilibrio entre los derechos y deberes de niños, niñas y adolescentes,<br />
en la forma que mejor convenga a la realización de sus derechos y garantías.<br />
Este principio prevalece sobre el principio de diversidad étnica y cultural.<br />
El interés superior del niño es un principio de interpretación de la presente<br />
Ley. Nadie podrá invocarlo contra norma expresa y sin escuchar previamente<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 15
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
la opinión del niño, niña o adolescente involucrado, que esté en condiciones<br />
de expresarla.<br />
Art. 12.- Prioridad absoluta.- En la formulación y ejecución de las<br />
políticas públicas y en la provisión de recursos, debe asignarse prioridad<br />
absoluta a la niñez y adolescencia, a las que se asegurará, además, el acceso<br />
preferente a los servicios públicos y a cualquier clase de atención que<br />
requieran.<br />
Se dará prioridad especial a la atención de niños y niñas menores de seis<br />
años.<br />
En caso de conflicto, los derechos de los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
prevalecen sobre los derechos de los demás.<br />
Art. 13.- Ejercicio progresivo. - El ejercicio de los derechos y garantías<br />
y el cumplimiento de los deberes y responsabilidades de niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes se harán de manera progresiva, de acuerdo a su grado de<br />
desarrollo y madurez. Se prohíbe cualquier restricción al ejercicio de estos<br />
derechos y garantías que no esté expresamente contemplado en este Código.<br />
Art. 14.- Aplicación e interpretación más favorable al niño, niña y<br />
adolescente. - Ninguna autoridad judicial o administrativa podrá invocar falta<br />
o insuficiencia de norma o procedimiento expreso para justificar la violación o<br />
desconocimiento de los derechos de los niños, niñas y adolescentes.<br />
Las normas del ordenamiento jurídico, las cláusulas y estipulaciones de los<br />
actos y contratos en que intervengan niños, niñas o adolescentes, o que se<br />
refieran a ellos, deben interpretarse de acuerdo al principio del interés superior<br />
del niño.<br />
TITULO III<br />
DERECHOS, GARANTIAS Y DEBERES<br />
Capítulo I<br />
Disposiciones generales<br />
Art. 15. - Titularidad de derechos.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
son sujetos de derechos y garantías y, como tales, gozan de todos aquellos<br />
que las leyes contemplan en favor de las personas, además de aquellos<br />
específicos de su edad.<br />
Los niños, niñas y adolescentes extranjeros que se encuentren bajo<br />
jurisdicción del Ecuador, gozarán de los mismos derechos y garantías<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 16
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
reconocidas por la ley a los ciudadanos ecuatorianos, con las limitaciones<br />
establecidas en la Constitución y en las leyes.<br />
Art. 16.- Naturaleza de estos derechos y garantías.- Por su<br />
naturaleza, los derechos y garantías de la niñez y adolescencia son de orden<br />
público, interdependientes, indivisibles, irrenunciables e intransigibles, salvo<br />
las excepciones expresamente señaladas en la ley.<br />
Art. 17. - Deber jurídico de denunciar.- Toda persona, incluidas las<br />
autoridades judiciales y administrativas, que por cualquier medio tenga<br />
conocimiento de la violación de un derecho del niño, niña o adolescente, está<br />
obligada a denunciarla ante la autoridad competente, en un plazo máximo de<br />
cuarenta y ocho horas.<br />
Art. 18.- Exigibilidad de los derechos.- Los derechos y garantías que<br />
las leyes reconocen en favor del niño, niña y adolescente, son potestades<br />
cuya observancia y protección son exigibles a las personas y organismos<br />
responsables de asegurar su eficacia, en la forma que este Código y más<br />
leyes establecen para el efecto.<br />
Art. 19.- Sanciones por violación de derechos. - Las violaciones a los<br />
derechos de los niños, niñas y adolescentes serán sancionadas en la forma<br />
prescrita en este Código y más leyes, sin perjuicio de la reparación que<br />
corresponda como consecuencia de la responsabilidad civil.<br />
Capítulo II<br />
Derechos de supervivencia<br />
Art. 20.- Derecho a la vida.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen<br />
derecho a la vida desde su concepción. Es obligación del Estado, la sociedad<br />
y la familia asegurar por todos los medios a su alcance, su supervivencia y<br />
desarrollo.<br />
Se prohíben los experimentos y manipulaciones médicas y genéticas desde la<br />
fecundación del óvulo hasta el nacimiento de niños, niñas y adolescentes; y la<br />
utilización de cualquier técnica o práctica que ponga en peligro su vida o<br />
afecte su integridad o desarrollo integral.<br />
Art. 21.- Derecho a conocer a los progenitores y mantener<br />
relaciones con ellos.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a<br />
conocer a su padre y madre, a ser cuidados por ellos y a mantener relaciones<br />
afectivas permanentes, personales y regulares con ambos progenitores y<br />
demás parientes, especialmente cuando se encuentran separados por<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 17
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
cualquier circunstancia, salvo que la convivencia o relación afecten sus<br />
derechos y garantías.<br />
No se les privará de este derecho por falta o escasez de recursos económicos<br />
de sus progenitores.<br />
En los casos de desconocimiento del paradero del padre, de la madre, o de<br />
ambos, el Estado, los parientes y demás personas que tengan información<br />
sobre aquél, deberán proporcionarla y <strong>of</strong>recer las facilidades para localizarlos.<br />
Art. 22.- Derecho a tener una familia y a la convivencia familiar.- Los<br />
niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a vivir y desarrollarse en su familia<br />
biológica. El Estado, la sociedad y la familia deben adoptar prioritariamente<br />
medidas apropiadas que permitan su permanencia en dicha familia.<br />
Excepcionalmente, cuando aquello sea imposible o contrario a su interés<br />
superior, los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a otra familia, de<br />
conformidad con la ley.<br />
En todos los casos, la familia debe proporcionarles un clima de afecto y<br />
comprensión que permita el respeto de sus derechos y su desarrollo integral.<br />
El acogimiento institucional, el internamiento preventivo, la privación de<br />
libertad o cualquier otra solución que los distraiga del medio familiar, debe<br />
aplicarse como última y excepcional medida.<br />
Art. 23.- Protección prenatal.- Se sustituirá la aplicación de penas y<br />
medidas privativas de libertad a la mujer embarazada hasta noventa días<br />
después del parto, debiendo el Juez disponer las medidas cautelares que<br />
sean del caso.<br />
El Juez podrá ampliar este plazo en el caso de madres de hijos con<br />
discapacidad grave y calificada por el organismo pertinente, por todo el tiempo<br />
que sea menester, según las necesidades del niño o niña.<br />
El responsable de la aplicación de esta norma que viole esta prohibición o<br />
permita que otro la contravenga, será sancionado en la forma prevista en este<br />
Código.<br />
Art. 24.- Derecho a la lactancia materna.- Los niños y niñas tienen<br />
derecho a la lactancia materna para asegurarle el vínculo afectivo con su<br />
madre, adecuada nutrición, crecimiento y desarrollo.<br />
Es obligación de los establecimientos de salud públicos y privados desarrollar<br />
programas de estimulación de la lactancia materna.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 18
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Art. 25.- Atención al embarazo y al parto.- El poder público y las<br />
instituciones de salud y asistencia a niños, niñas y adolescentes crearán las<br />
condiciones adecuadas para la atención durante el embarazo y el parto, a<br />
favor de la madre y del niño o niña, especialmente tratándose de madres<br />
adolescentes y de niños o niñas con peso inferior a dos mil quinientos gramos.<br />
Art. 26.- Derecho a una vida digna.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
tienen derecho a una vida digna, que les permita disfrutar de las condiciones<br />
socioeconómicas necesarias para su desarrollo integral.<br />
Este derecho incluye aquellas prestaciones que aseguren una alimentación<br />
nutritiva, equilibrada y suficiente, recreación y juego, acceso a los servicios de<br />
salud, a educación de calidad, vestuario adecuado, vivienda segura, higiénica<br />
y dotada de los servicios básicos.<br />
Para el caso de los niños, niñas y adolescentes con discapacidades, el<br />
Estado y las instituciones que las atienden deberán garantizar las condiciones,<br />
ayudas técnicas y eliminación de barreras arquitectónicas para la<br />
comunicación y transporte.<br />
Art. 27.- Derecho a la salud.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen<br />
derecho a disfrutar del más alto nivel de salud física, mental, psicológica y<br />
sexual.<br />
El derecho a la salud de los niños, niñas y adolescentes comprende:<br />
1. Acceso gratuito a los programas y acciones de salud públicos, a una<br />
nutrición adecuada y a un medio ambiente saludable;<br />
2. Acceso permanente e ininterrumpido a los servicios de salud públicos,<br />
para la prevención, tratamiento de las enfermedades y la rehabilitación<br />
de la salud. Los servicios de salud públicos son gratuitos para los niños,<br />
niñas y adolescentes que los necesiten;<br />
3. Acceso a medicina gratuita para los niños, niñas y adolescentes que las<br />
necesiten;<br />
4. Acceso inmediato y eficaz a los servicios médicos de emergencia,<br />
públicos y privados;<br />
5. Información sobre su estado de salud, de acuerdo al nivel evolutivo del<br />
niño, niña o adolescente;<br />
6. Información y educación sobre los principios básicos de prevención en<br />
materia de salud, saneamiento ambiental, primeros auxilios;<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 19
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
7. Atención con procedimientos y recursos de las medicinas alternativas y<br />
tradicionales;<br />
8. El vivir y desarrollarse en un ambiente estable y afectivo que les<br />
permitan un adecuado desarrollo emocional;<br />
9. El acceso a servicios que fortalezcan el vínculo afectivo entre el niño o<br />
niña y su madre y padre; y,<br />
10. El derecho de las madres a recibir atención sanitaria prenatal y postnatal<br />
apropiadas.<br />
Se prohíbe la venta de estupefacientes, substancias psicotrópicas y otras que<br />
puedan producir adicción, bebidas alcohólicas, pegamentos industriales,<br />
tabaco, armas de fuego y explosivos de cualquier clase, a niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes.<br />
Art. 28.- Responsabilidad del Estado en relación a este derecho a la<br />
salud.- Son obligaciones del Estado, que se cumplirán a través del Ministerio<br />
de Salud:<br />
1. Elaborar y poner en ejecución las políticas, planes y programas que<br />
favorezcan el goce del derecho contemplado en el artículo anterior;<br />
2. Fomentar las iniciativas necesarias para ampliar la cobertura y calidad<br />
de los servicios de salud, particularmente la atención primaria de salud;<br />
y adoptará las medidas apropiadas para combatir la mortalidad materno<br />
infantil, la desnutrición infantil y las enfermedades que afectan a la<br />
población infantil;<br />
3. Promover la acción interdisciplinaria en el estudio y diagnóstico<br />
temprano de los retardos del desarrollo, para que reciban el tratamiento<br />
y estimulación oportunos;<br />
4. Garantizar la provisión de medicina gratuita para niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes;<br />
5. Controlar la aplicación del esquema completo de vacunación;<br />
6. Desarrollar programas de educación dirigidos a los progenitores y<br />
demás personas a cargo del cuidado de los niños, niñas y adolescentes,<br />
para brindarles instrucción en los principios básicos de su salud y<br />
nutrición, y en las ventajas de la higiene y saneamiento ambiental; y,<br />
7. Organizar servicios de atención específica para niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes con discapacidades físicas, mentales o sensoriales.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 20
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Art. 29.- Obligaciones de los progenitores.- Corresponde a los<br />
progenitores y demás personas encargadas del cuidado de los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes, brindar la atención de salud que esté a su alcance y asegurar el<br />
cumplimiento de las prescripciones, controles y disposiciones médicas y de<br />
salubridad.<br />
Art. 30.- Obligaciones de los establecimientos de salud.- Los<br />
establecimientos de salud, públicos y privados, cualquiera sea su nivel, están<br />
obligados a:<br />
1. Prestar los servicios médicos de emergencia a todo niño, niña y<br />
adolescente que los requieran, sin exigir pagos anticipados ni garantías<br />
de ninguna naturaleza. No se podrá negar esta atención a pretexto de la<br />
ausencia del representante legal, la carencia de recursos económicos, la<br />
falta de cupo, la causa u origen de la emergencia u otra circunstancia<br />
similar;<br />
2. Informar sobre el estado de salud del niño, niña o adolescente, a sus<br />
progenitores o representantes;<br />
3. Mantener registros individuales en los que conste la atención y<br />
seguimiento del embarazo, el parto y el puerperio; y registros<br />
actualizados de los datos personales, domicilio permanente y<br />
referencias familiares de la madre;<br />
4. Identificar a los recién nacidos inmediatamente después del parto,<br />
mediante el registro de sus impresiones dactilar y plantar y los nombres,<br />
apellidos, edad e impresión dactilar de la madre; y expedir el certificado<br />
legal correspondiente para su inscripción inmediata en el Registro Civil;<br />
5. Informar oportunamente a los progenitores sobre los requisitos y<br />
procedimientos legales para la inscripción del niño o niña en el Registro<br />
Civil;<br />
6. Garantizar la permanencia segura del recién nacido junto a su madre,<br />
hasta que ambos se encuentren en condiciones de salud que les<br />
permitan subsistir sin peligro fuera del establecimiento;<br />
7. Diagnosticar y hacer un seguimiento médico a los niños y niñas que<br />
nazcan con problemas patológicos o discapacidades de cualquier tipo;<br />
8. Informar oportunamente a los progenitores sobre los cuidados ordinarios<br />
y especiales que deben brindar al recién nacida, especialmente a los<br />
niños y niñas a quienes se haya detectado alguna discapacidad;<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 21
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
9. Incentivar que el niño o niña sea alimentado a través de la lactancia<br />
materna, por lo menos hasta el primer año de vida;<br />
10. Proporcionar un trato de calidez y calidad compatibles con la dignidad<br />
del niño, niña y adolescente;<br />
11. Informar inmediatamente a las autoridades y organismos competentes<br />
los casos de niños o niñas y adolescentes con indicios de maltrato o<br />
abuso sexual; y aquellos en los que se desconozca la identidad o el<br />
domicilio de los progenitores;<br />
12. Recoger y conservar los elementos de prueba de maltrato o abuso<br />
sexual; y,<br />
13. Informar a las autoridades competentes cuando nazcan niños con<br />
discapacidad evidente.<br />
Art. 31.- Derecho a la seguridad social.- Los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes tienen derecho a la seguridad social. Este derecho consiste en el<br />
acceso efectivo a las prestaciones y beneficios generales del sistema, de<br />
conformidad con la ley.<br />
Art. 32.- Derecho a un medio ambiente sano.- Todo los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes tienen derecho a vivir en un ambiente sano, ecológicamente<br />
equilibrado y libre de contaminación, que garantice su salud, seguridad<br />
alimentaria y desarrollo integral.<br />
El Gobierno Central y los gobiernos seccionales establecerán políticas claras y<br />
precisas para la conservación del medio ambiente y el ecosistema.<br />
Capítulo III<br />
Derechos relacionados con el desarrollo<br />
Art. 33. - Derecho a la identidad.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
tienen derecho a la identidad y a los elementos que la constituyen,<br />
especialmente el nombre, la nacionalidad y sus relaciones de familia, de<br />
conformidad con la ley.<br />
Es obligación del Estado preservar la identidad de los niños; niñas y<br />
adolescentes y sancionar a los responsables de la alteración, sustitución o<br />
privación de este derecho.<br />
Art. 34.- Derecho a la identidad cultural.- Los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes tienen derecho a conservar, desarrollar, fortalecer y recuperar su<br />
identidad y valores espirituales, culturales, religiosos, lingüísticos, políticos y<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 22
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
sociales y a ser protegidos contra cualquier tipo de interferencia que tenga por<br />
objeto sustituir, alterar o disminuir estos valores.<br />
Art. 35. - Derecho a la identificación.- Los niños y niñas tienen derecho<br />
a ser inscritos inmediatamente después del nacimiento, con los apellidos<br />
paterno y materno que les correspondan. El Estado garantizará el derecho a la<br />
identidad y a la identificación mediante un servicio de Registro Civil con<br />
procedimientos ágiles, gratuitos y sencillos para la obtención de los<br />
documentos de identidad.<br />
Art. 36.- Normas para la identificación.- En la certificación de nacido<br />
vivo, que deberá ser emitida bajo la responsabilidad del centro o institución de<br />
salud pública o privada que atendió el nacimiento, constará la identificación<br />
dactilar de la madre y la identificación plantar del niño o niña recién nacido o<br />
nacida. En casos de inscripción tardía se deberá registrar en la ficha<br />
respectiva la identificación dactilar del niño, niña o adolescente.<br />
Cuando se desconozca la identidad de uno de los progenitores, el niño, niña o<br />
adolescente llevará los apellidos del progenitor que lo inscribe, sin perjuicio del<br />
derecho a obtener el reconocimiento legal del otro progenitor.<br />
Si se desconoce la identidad o domicilio de ambos progenitores, el niño, niña<br />
o adolescente se inscribirá por orden judicial o administrativa, con dos<br />
nombres y dos apellidos de uso común en el país. Se respetará el nombre con<br />
el cual ha sido conocido y se tomará en cuenta su opinión cuando sea posible.<br />
La inscripción podrá ser solicitada por la persona encargada del programa de<br />
protección a cargo del niño o niña o por la Junta de Protección de Derechos.<br />
Practicada la inscripción, el Jefe Cantonal del Registro Civil pondrá el caso en<br />
conocimiento de la Defensoría del Pueblo de la jurisdicción correspondiente,<br />
para que inicie las gestiones extrajudiciales tendientes al esclarecimiento de la<br />
filiación del niño o niña y posterior reconocimiento voluntario o entable la<br />
acción para que sea declarada judicialmente.<br />
Comprobada y resuelta por la autoridad judicial o administrativa competente<br />
la sustitución, confusión o privación de identidad o de alguno de sus<br />
elementos, el Registro Civil iniciará de inmediato los procedimientos idóneos<br />
para restablecerla sin costo alguno para el afectado.<br />
Los niños y niñas de las comunidades, pueblos y nacionalidades indígenas<br />
del país, tienen el derecho a ser inscritos con nombres propios del respectivo<br />
idioma. Las autoridades del Registro Civil tienen la obligación de inscribir estos<br />
nombres sin ningún tipo de limitación u objeción.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 23
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Art. 37.- Derecho a la educación.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
tienen derecho a una educación de calidad. Este derecho demanda de un<br />
sistema educativo que:<br />
1. Garantice el acceso y permanencia de todo niño y niña a la educación<br />
básica, así como del adolescente hasta el bachillerato o su equivalente;<br />
2. Respete las culturas y especificidades de cada región y lugar;<br />
3. Contemple propuestas educacionales flexibles y alternativas para<br />
atender las necesidades de todos los niños, niñas y adolescentes, con<br />
prioridad de quienes tienen discapacidad, trabajan o viven una situación<br />
que requiera mayores oportunidades para aprender;<br />
4. Garantice que los niños, niñas y adolescentes cuenten con docentes,<br />
materiales didácticos, laboratorios, locales, instalaciones y recursos<br />
adecuados y gocen de un ambiente favorable para el aprendizaje. Este<br />
derecho incluye el acceso efectivo a la educación inicial de cero a cinco<br />
años, y por lo tanto se desarrollarán programas y proyectos flexibles y<br />
abiertos, adecuados a las necesidades culturales de los educandos; y,<br />
5. Que respete las convicciones éticas, morales y religiosas de los padres y<br />
de los mismos niños, niñas y adolescentes.<br />
La educación pública es laica en todos sus niveles, obligatoria hasta el décimo<br />
año de educación básica y gratuita hasta el bachillerato o su equivalencia.<br />
El Estado y los organismos pertinentes asegurarán que los planteles<br />
educativos <strong>of</strong>rezcan servicios con equidad, calidad y oportunidad y que se<br />
garantice también el derecho de los progenitores a elegir la educación que más<br />
convenga a sus hijos y a sus hijas.<br />
Art. 38.- Objetivos de los programas de educación.- La educación<br />
básica y media asegurarán los conocimientos, valores y actitudes<br />
indispensables para:<br />
a. Desarrollar la personalidad, las aptitudes y la capacidad mental y física<br />
del niño, niña y adolescente hasta su máximo potencial, en un entorno<br />
lúdico y afectivo;<br />
b. Promover y practicar la paz, el respeto a los derechos humanos y<br />
libertades fundamentales, la no discriminación, la tolerancia, la<br />
valoración de las diversidades, la participación, el diálogo, la autonomía<br />
y la cooperación;<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 24
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
c. Ejercitar, defender, promover y difundir los derechos de la niñez y<br />
adolescencia;<br />
d. Prepararlo para ejercer una ciudadanía responsable, en una sociedad<br />
libre, democrática y solidaria;<br />
e. Orientarlo sobre la función y responsabilidad de la familia, la equidad de<br />
sus relaciones internas, la paternidad y maternidad responsable y la<br />
conservación de la salud;<br />
f. Fortalecer el respeto a sus progenitores y maestros, a su propia<br />
identidad cultural, su idioma, sus valores, a los valores nacionales y a los<br />
de otros pueblos y culturas;<br />
g. Desarrollar un pensamiento autónomo, crítico y creativo;<br />
h. La capacitación para un trabajo productivo y para el manejo de<br />
conocimientos científicos y técnicos; e,<br />
i. El respeto al medio ambiente.<br />
Art. 39. - Derechos y deberes de los progenitores con relación al<br />
derecho a la educación.- Son derechos y deberes de los progenitores y<br />
demás responsables de los niños, niñas y adolescentes:<br />
1. Matricularlos en los planteles educativos;<br />
2. Seleccionar para sus hijos una educación acorde a sus principios y<br />
creencias;<br />
3. Participar activamente en el desarrollo de los procesos educativos;<br />
4. Controlar la asistencia de sus hijos, hijas o representados a los planteles<br />
educativos;<br />
5. Participar activamente para mejorar la calidad de la educación;<br />
6. Asegurar el máximo aprovechamiento de los medios educativos que les<br />
proporciona el Estado y la sociedad;<br />
7. Vigilar el respeto de los derechos de sus hijos, hijas o representados en<br />
los planteles educacionales; y,<br />
8. Denunciar las violaciones a esos derechos, de que tengan conocimiento.<br />
Art. 40.- Medidas disciplinarias.- La práctica docente y la disciplina en<br />
los planteles educativos respetarán los derechos y garantías de los niños,<br />
niñas y adolescentes; excluirán toda forma de abuso, maltrato y<br />
desvalorización, por tanto, cualquier forma de castigo cruel, inhumano y<br />
degradante.<br />
Art. 41.- Sanciones prohibidas.- Se prohíbe a los establecimientos<br />
educativos la aplicación de:<br />
1. Sanciones corporales;<br />
2. Sanciones psicológicas atentatorias a la dignidad de los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes;<br />
3. Se prohíben las sanciones colectivas; y,<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 25
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
4. Medidas que impliquen exclusión o discriminación por causa de una<br />
condición personal del estudiante, de sus progenitores, representantes<br />
legales o de quienes lo tengan bajo su cuidado. Se incluyen en esta<br />
prohibición las medidas discriminatorias por causa de embarazo o<br />
maternidad de una adolescente. A ningún niño, niña o adolescente se le<br />
podrá negar la matrícula o expulsar debido a la condición de sus padres.<br />
En todo procedimiento orientado a establecer la responsabilidad de un niño,<br />
niña o adolescente por un acto de indisciplina en un plantel educativo, se<br />
garantizará el derecho a la defensa del estudiante y de sus progenitores o<br />
representantes.<br />
Cualquier forma de atentado sexual en los planteles educativos será puesta<br />
en conocimiento del Agente Fiscal competente, para los efectos de la ley, sin<br />
perjuicio de las investigaciones y sanciones de orden administrativo que<br />
correspondan en el ámbito educativo.<br />
Art. 42.- Derecho a la educación de los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
con discapacidad.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes con discapacidades<br />
tienen derecho a la inclusión en el sistema educativo, en la medida de su nivel<br />
de discapacidad. Todas las unidades educativas están obligadas a recibirlos y<br />
a crear los apoyos y adaptaciones físicas, pedagógicas, de evaluación y<br />
promoción adecuados a sus necesidades.<br />
Art. 43. - Derecho a la vida cultural.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
tienen derecho a participar libremente en todas las expresiones de la vida<br />
cultural.<br />
En el ejercicio de este derecho pueden acceder a cualquier espectáculo<br />
público que haya sido calificado como adecuado para su edad, por la<br />
autoridad competente.<br />
Es obligación del Estado y los gobiernos seccionales impulsar<br />
actividades culturales, artísticas y deportivas a las cuales tengan acceso los<br />
niños, niñas y adolescentes.<br />
Art. 44.- Derechos culturales de los pueblos indígenas y negros o<br />
afroecuatorianos.- Todo programa de atención y cuidado a los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes de las nacionalidades y pueblos indígenas, negros o<br />
afroecuatorianos, deberá respetar la cosmovisión, realidad cultural y<br />
conocimientos de su respectiva nacionalidad o pueblo y tener en cuenta sus<br />
necesidades especificas, de conformidad con la Constitución y la ley.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 26
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Las entidades de atención, públicas y privadas, que brinden servicios a dichos<br />
niños, niñas y adolescentes, deberán coordinar sus actividades con las<br />
correspondientes entidades de esas nacionalidades o pueblos.<br />
Art. 45.- Derecho a la información.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
tienen derecho a buscar y escoger información; y a utilizar los diferentes<br />
medios y fuentes de comunicación, con las limitaciones establecidas en la ley<br />
y aquellas que se derivan del ejercicio de la patria potestad.<br />
Es deber del Estado, la sociedad y la familia, asegurar que la niñez y<br />
adolescencia reciban una información adecuada, veraz y pluralista; y<br />
proporcionarles orientación y una educación crítica que les permita ejercitar<br />
apropiadamente los derechos señalados en el inciso anterior.<br />
Art. 46.- Prohibiciones relativas al derecho a la información. - Se<br />
prohíbe:<br />
1. La circulación de publicaciones, videos y grabaciones dirigidos y<br />
destinados a la niñez y adolescencia, que contengan imágenes, textos o<br />
mensajes inadecuados para su desarrollo; y cualquier forma de acceso<br />
de niños, niñas y adolescentes a estos medios;<br />
2. La difusión de información inadecuada para niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
en horarios de franja familiar, ni en publicaciones dirigidas a la familia y a<br />
los niños, niñas y adolescentes; y,<br />
3. La circulación de cualquier producto destinado a niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes, con envoltorios que contengan imágenes, textos o<br />
mensajes inadecuados para su desarrollo.<br />
Estas prohibiciones se aplican a los medios, sistemas de comunicación,<br />
empresas de publicidad y programas.<br />
Art. 47. - Garantías de acceso a una información adecuada.- Para<br />
garantizar el derecho a la información adecuada, de que trata el artículo<br />
anterior, el Estado deberá:<br />
a) Requerir a los medios de comunicación social, la difusión de información<br />
y materiales de interés social y cultural para niños, niñas y adolescentes;<br />
b) Exigirles que proporcionen, en forma gratuita, espacios destinados a<br />
programas del Consejo Nacional de Niñez y Adolescencia;<br />
c) Promover la producción y difusión de literatura infantil y juvenil;<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 27
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
d) Requerir a los medios de comunicación la producción y difusión de<br />
programas acordes con las necesidades lingüísticas de niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes pertenecientes a los diversos grupos étnicos;<br />
e) Impedir la difusión de información inadecuada para niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes en horarios de franja familiar, ni en publicaciones dirigidas<br />
a la familia y a los niños, niñas y adolescentes;<br />
f) Sancionar de acuerdo a lo previsto en esta Ley, a las personas que<br />
faciliten a los menores: libros, escritos, afiches, propaganda, videos o<br />
cualquier otro medio auditivo y/o visual que hagan apología de la<br />
violencia o el delito, que tengan imágenes o contenidos pornográficos o<br />
que perjudiquen la formación del menor; y,<br />
g) Exigir a los medios de comunicación audiovisual que anuncien con la<br />
debida anticipación y suficiente notoriedad, la naturaleza de la<br />
información y programas que presentan y la clasificación de la edad para<br />
su audiencia.<br />
Se consideran inadecuados para el desarrollo de los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes los textos, imágenes, mensajes y programas que inciten a la<br />
violencia, exploten el miedo o aprovechen la falta de madurez de los niños,<br />
niñas y adolescentes para inducirlos a comportamientos perjudiciales o<br />
peligrosos para su salud y seguridad personal y todo cuanto atente a la moral<br />
o el pudor.<br />
En cualquier caso, la aplicación de medidas o decisiones relacionadas con<br />
esta garantía, deberán observar fielmente las disposiciones del Reglamento<br />
para el Control de la Discrecionalidad de los Actos de la Administración<br />
Pública, expedido por el Presidente de la República.<br />
Art. 48.- Derecho a la recreación y al descanso.- Los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes tienen derecho a la recreación, al descanso, al juego, al deporte<br />
y más actividades propias de cada etapa evolutiva.<br />
Es obligación del Estado y de los gobiernos seccionales promocionar e<br />
inculcar en la niñez y adolescencia, la práctica de juegos tradicionales; crear y<br />
mantener espacios e instalaciones seguras y accesibles, programas y<br />
espectáculos públicos adecuados, seguros y gratuitos para el ejercicio de este<br />
derecho.<br />
Los establecimientos educativos deberán contar con áreas deportivas,<br />
recreativas, artísticas y culturales, y destinar los recursos presupuestarios<br />
suficientes para desarrollar estas actividades.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 28
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
El Consejo Nacional de la Niñez y Adolescencia dictará regulaciones sobre<br />
programas y espectáculos públicos, comercialización y uso de juegos y<br />
programas computarizados, electrónicos o de otro tipo, con el objeto de<br />
asegurar que no afecten al desarrollo integral de los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes.<br />
Art. 49.- Normas sobre el acceso a espectáculos públicos. - Se<br />
prohíbe el ingreso de niños, niñas y adolescentes a los espectáculos que<br />
hayan sido calificados como inconvenientes para su edad.<br />
Los espectáculos públicos adecuados para la niñez y adolescencia gozarán de<br />
un régimen especial respecto de los impuestos y contribuciones fiscales y<br />
municipales, que se reglamentará por las autoridades respectivas. Si se han<br />
organizado exclusivamente en beneficio de los establecimientos de protección,<br />
gozarán de exoneración de impuestos.<br />
En los espectáculos a que se refiere el artículo anterior, serán admitidos en<br />
forma gratuita y obligatoria los niños, niñas y adolescentes pertenecientes a<br />
establecimientos de protección.<br />
Las empresas responsables de los espectáculos deberán <strong>of</strong>recer las<br />
seguridades necesarias y garantizar las medidas en caso de accidente.<br />
Capítulo IV<br />
Derechos de protección<br />
Art. 50.- Derecho a la integridad personal.- Los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes tienen derecho a que se respete su integridad personal, física,<br />
psicológica, cultural, afectiva y sexual. No podrán ser sometidos a torturas,<br />
tratos crueles y degradantes.<br />
Art. 51.- Derecho a la libertad personal, dignidad, reputación, honor<br />
e imagen.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a que se respete:<br />
a) Su libertad, sin más limitaciones que las establecidas en la ley. Los<br />
progenitores y responsables de sus cuidados los orientarán en el<br />
ejercicio de este derecho; y,<br />
b) Su dignidad, autoestima, honra, reputación e imagen propia. Deberá<br />
proporcionárseles relaciones de calidez y buen trato fundamentadas en<br />
el reconocimiento de su dignidad y el respeto a las diferencias.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 29
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Art. 52.- Prohibiciones relacionadas con el derecho a la dignidad e<br />
imagen. Se prohíbe:<br />
1. La participación de niños, niñas y adolescentes en programas, mensajes<br />
publicitarios, en producciones de contenido pornográfico y en<br />
espectáculos cuyos contenidos sean inadecuados para su edad;<br />
2. La utilización de niños y niñas o adolescentes en programas o<br />
espectáculos de proselitismo político o religioso;<br />
3. La publicación o exhibición de noticias, reportajes, crónicas, historias de<br />
vida o cualquiera otra expresión periodística con imagen o nombres<br />
propios de niños, niñas o adolescentes que han sido víctimas de<br />
maltrato o abuso;<br />
4. La publicación o exhibición de imágenes y grabaciones o referencias<br />
escritas que permitan la identificación o individualización de un niño,<br />
niña o adolescente que ha sido víctima de maltrato, abuso sexual o<br />
infracción penal, y cualquier otra referencia al entorno en el que se<br />
desarrollan; y,<br />
5. La publicación del nombre, así como de la imagen de los menores<br />
acusados o sentenciados por delitos o faltas.<br />
Aun en los casos permitidos por la ley, no se podrá utilizar públicamente la<br />
imagen de un adolescente mayor de quince años, sin su autorización expresa;<br />
ni la de un niño, niña o adolescente menor de dicha edad, sin la autorización<br />
de su representante legal, quien sólo la dará si no lesiona los derechos de su<br />
representado.<br />
Art. 53. - Derecho a la privacidad y a la inviolabilidad del hogar y las<br />
formas de comunicación.- Sin perjuicio de la natural vigilancia de los padres<br />
y maestros, los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a que se respete la<br />
intimidad de su vida privada y familiar; y la privacidad e inviolabilidad de su<br />
domicilio, correspondencia y comunicaciones telefónicas y electrónicas, de<br />
conformidad con la ley.<br />
Se prohíbe las injerencias arbitrarias o ilegales en su vida privada.<br />
Art. 54.- Derecho a la reserva de la información sobre antecedentes<br />
penales.- Los adolescentes que hayan sido investigados, sometidos a<br />
proceso, privados de su libertad o a quienes se haya aplicado una medida<br />
socio-educativa, con motivo de una infracción penal, tienen derecho a que no<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 30
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
se hagan públicos sus antecedentes policiales o judiciales y a que se respete<br />
la reserva de la información procesal en la forma dispuesta en esta Ley, a<br />
menos que el Juez competente lo autorice en resolución motivada, en la que<br />
se expongan con claridad y precisión las circunstancias que justifican hacer<br />
pública la información.<br />
Art. 55.- Derecho de los niños, niñas y adolescentes con<br />
discapacidades o necesidades especiales.- Además de los derechos y<br />
garantías generales que la ley contempla a favor de los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes, aquellos que tengan alguna discapacidad o necesidad especial<br />
gozarán de los derechos que sean necesarios para el desarrollo integral de su<br />
personalidad hasta el máximo de sus potencialidades y para el disfrute de una<br />
vida plena, digna y dotada de la mayor autonomía posible, de modo que<br />
puedan participar activamente en la sociedad, de acuerdo a su condición.<br />
Tendrán también el derecho a ser informados sobre las causas,<br />
consecuencias y pronóstico de su discapacidad y sobre los derechos que les<br />
asisten.<br />
El Estado asegurará el ejercicio de estos derechos mediante su acceso<br />
efectivo a la educación y a la capacitación que requieren; y la prestación de<br />
servicios de estimulación temprana, rehabilitación, preparación para la<br />
actividad laboral, esparcimiento y otras necesarias, que serán gratuitos para<br />
los niños, niñas y adolescentes cuyos progenitores o responsables de su<br />
cuidado no estén en condiciones de pagarlos.<br />
Art. 56.- Derecho de los hijos de las personas privadas de libertad.-<br />
Los niños; niñas y adolescentes que no gocen de su medio familiar por<br />
encontrarse uno o ambos progenitores privados de su libertad, deberán recibir<br />
protección y asistencia especiales del Estado, fuera de los centros de<br />
rehabilitación, mediante modalidades de atención que aseguren su derecho a<br />
la convivencia familiar y comunitaria y a las relaciones personales directas y<br />
regulares con sus progenitores.<br />
Art. 57.- Derecho a protección especial en casos de desastres y<br />
conflictos armados.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a<br />
protección especial en casos de desastres naturales y de conflictos armados<br />
internos o internacionales. Esta protección se expresará, entre otras medidas,<br />
en la provisión prioritaria de medios de evacuación de las zonas afectadas,<br />
alojamiento, alimentación, atención médica y medicinas.<br />
El Estado garantiza el respeto irrestricto de las normas del derecho<br />
internacional humanitario en favor de los niños, niñas y adolescentes a los que<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 31
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
se refiere este artículo; y asegurará los recursos, medios y mecanismos para<br />
que se reintegren a la vida social con la plenitud de sus derechos y deberes.<br />
Se prohíbe reclutar o permitir la participación directa de niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes en hostilidades armadas internas e internacionales.<br />
Art. 58.- Derecho de los niños, niñas y adolescentes refugiados.-<br />
Los niños, niñas y adolescentes que soliciten o a quienes se les haya<br />
concedido el estatuto de refugiado, tienen derecho a recibir protección<br />
humanitaria y la asistencia necesaria para el pleno disfrute de sus derechos.<br />
El mismo derecho asiste a sus progenitores y a las personas encargadas de<br />
su cuidado.<br />
Capítulo V<br />
Derechos de participación<br />
Art. 59.- Derecho a la libertad de expresión.- Los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes tienen derecho a expresarse libremente, a buscar, recibir y<br />
difundir informaciones e ideas de todo tipo, oralmente, por escrito o cualquier<br />
otro medio que elijan, con las únicas restricciones que impongan la ley, el<br />
orden público, la salud o la moral públicas para proteger la seguridad,<br />
derechos y libertades fundamentales de los demás.<br />
Art. 60.- Derecho a ser consultados.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
tienen derecho a ser consultados en todos los asuntos que les afecten. Esta<br />
opinión se tendrá en cuenta en la medida de su edad y madurez.<br />
Ningún niño, niña o adolescente podrá ser obligado o presionado de cualquier<br />
forma para expresar su opinión.<br />
Art. 61.- Derecho a la libertad de pensamiento, conciencia y<br />
religión.- El Estado garantiza, en favor de los niños, niñas y adolescentes, las<br />
libertades de pensamiento, de conciencia y de religión, sujetas a las<br />
limitaciones prescritas por la ley y que sean necesarias para proteger la<br />
seguridad, los derechos y libertades fundamentales de los demás.<br />
Es derecho y deber de los progenitores y demás personas encargadas de su<br />
cuidado, orientar al niño, niña o adolescente para el adecuado ejercicio de<br />
este derecho, según su desarrollo evolutivo.<br />
Art. 62.- Derecho a la libertad de reunión.- Los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes tienen derecho a reunirse pública y pacíficamente para la<br />
promoción, defensa y ejercicio de sus derechos y garantías.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 32
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Art. 63.- Derecho de libre asociación.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
tienen derecho a asociarse libremente con fines lícitos. Este derecho incluye la<br />
posibilidad de los adolescentes de constituir asociaciones sin fines de lucro,<br />
con arreglo a la ley.<br />
El Estado garantizará y fomentará el ejercicio de este derecho; principalmente<br />
en materia de asociaciones estudiantiles, culturales, deportivas, laborales y<br />
comunitarias.<br />
Se prohíbe cualquier restricción al ejercicio de este derecho, que no esté<br />
expresamente prevista en la ley.<br />
Capítulo VI<br />
Deberes, capacidad y responsabilidad de los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
Art. 64.- Deberes.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen los deberes<br />
generales que la Constitución Política impone a los ciudadanos, en cuanto<br />
sean compatibles con su condición y etapa evolutiva. Están obligados de<br />
manera especial a:<br />
1. Respetar a la Patria y sus símbolos;<br />
2. Conocer la realidad del país, cultivar la identidad nacional y respetar su<br />
pluriculturalidad; ejercer y defender efectivamente sus derechos y<br />
garantías;<br />
3. Respetar los derechos y garantías individuales y colectivas de los<br />
demás;<br />
4. Cultivar los valores de respeto, solidaridad, tolerancia, paz, justicia,<br />
equidad y democracia;<br />
5. Cumplir sus responsabilidades relativas a la educación;<br />
6. Actuar con honestidad y responsabilidad en el hogar y en todas las<br />
etapas del proceso educativo;<br />
7. Respetar a sus progenitores, maestros y más responsables de su<br />
cuidado y educación; y,<br />
8. Respetar y contribuir a la preservación del medio ambiente y de los<br />
recursos naturales.<br />
Art. 65.- Validez de los actos jurídicos.- La capacidad jurídica respecto<br />
a los actos celebrados por niños, niñas y adolescentes se estará a lo previsto<br />
en el Código Civil, a excepción de los siguientes casos:<br />
1. Los actos y contratos de los adolescentes que no han cumplido quince<br />
años, son relativamente nulos sin perjuicio de la validez que la ley<br />
confiera para la celebración de determinados actos;<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 33
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
2. Las personas que han cumplido quince años, además, tienen capacidad<br />
legal para celebrar contratos de trabajo según las normas del presente<br />
Código; y,<br />
3. Para celebrar los actos y contratos que estén comprendidos en el objeto<br />
de una organización estudiantil, laboral, cultural, artística, ambiental,<br />
deportiva o vecinal, de las que sean personeros o legítimos<br />
representantes en el ejercicio de su derecho de asociación y cuya<br />
cuantía no exceda a dos mil dólares.<br />
Los adolescentes podrán ejercer directamente aquellas acciones judiciales<br />
encaminadas al ejercicio y protección de sus derechos y garantías. Los niños y<br />
niñas podrán pedir directamente auxilio para la protección de sus derechos<br />
cuando deban dirigir la acción contra su representante legal.<br />
Art. 66.- Responsabilidad de los niños, niñas y adolescentes. - Los<br />
niños y niñas están exentos de responsabilidad jurídica. Por sus hechos y<br />
actos dañosos, responderán civilmente sus progenitores o guardadores en los<br />
casos y formas previstos en el Código Civil.<br />
Los adolescentes son responsables por sus actos jurídicos y hechos ilícitos,<br />
en los términos de este Código. Su responsabilidad civil por los actos o<br />
contratos que celebren se hará efectiva sobre su peculio pr<strong>of</strong>esional o<br />
industrial o sobre los bienes de la asociación que representen de acuerdo con<br />
lo prevenido en el artículo anterior, según sea el caso.<br />
TITULO IV<br />
De la protección contra el maltrato, abuso, explotación<br />
sexual, trafico y perdida de niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />
Art. 67.- Concepto de maltrato.- Se entiende por maltrato toda<br />
conducta, de acción u omisión, que provoque o pueda provocar daño a la<br />
integridad o salud física, psicológica o sexual de un niño, niña o adolescente,<br />
por parte de cualquier persona, incluidos sus progenitores, otros parientes,<br />
educadores y personas a cargo de su cuidado; cualesquiera sean el medio<br />
utilizado para el efecto, sus consecuencias y el tiempo necesario para la<br />
recuperación de la víctima. Se incluyen en esta calificación el trato negligente<br />
o descuido grave o reiterado en el cumplimiento de las obligaciones para con<br />
los niños, niñas y adolescentes, relativas a la prestación de alimentos,<br />
alimentación, atención médica educación o cuidados diarios; y su utilización<br />
en la mendicidad.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 34
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Maltrato psicológico es el que ocasiona perturbación emocional, alteración<br />
psicológica o disminución de la autoestima en el niño, niña o adolescente<br />
agredido. Se incluyen en esta modalidad las amenazas de causar un daño en<br />
su persona o bienes o en los de sus progenitores, otros parientes o personas<br />
encargadas de su cuidado.<br />
El maltrato es institucional cuando lo comete un servidor de una institución<br />
pública o privada, como resultado de la aplicación de reglamentos, prácticas<br />
administrativas o pedagógicas aceptadas expresa o tácitamente por la<br />
institución; y cuando sus autoridades lo han conocido y no han adoptado las<br />
medidas para prevenirlo, hacerlo cesar, remediarlo y sancionarlo de manera<br />
inmediata.<br />
La responsabilidad por maltrato institucional recae en el autor del maltrato y<br />
en el representante legal, autoridad o responsable de la institución o<br />
establecimiento al que pertenece.<br />
En el caso de los representantes legales, autoridades o responsables de la<br />
institución o establecimiento, la responsabilidad se hará efectiva de<br />
conformidad con las disposiciones previstas en la Constitución Política de la<br />
República, en el Código Civil y demás leyes aplicables.<br />
Art. 68.- Concepto de abuso sexual.- Sin perjuicio de lo que dispone el<br />
Código Penal sobre la materia, para los efectos del presente Código<br />
constituye abuso sexual todo contacto físico, sugerencia de naturaleza sexual,<br />
a los que se somete un niño, niña o adolescente, aun con su aparente<br />
consentimiento, mediante seducción, chantaje, intimidación, engaños,<br />
amenazas, o cualquier otro medio.<br />
Cualquier forma de acoso o abuso sexual será puesta en conocimiento del<br />
Agente Fiscal competente para los efectos de la ley, sin perjuicio de las<br />
investigaciones y sanciones de orden administrativo que correspondan.<br />
Art. 69.- Concepto de explotación sexual.- Constituyen explotación<br />
sexual la prostitución y la pornografía infantil. Prostitución infantil es la<br />
utilización de un niño, niña o adolescente en actividades sexuales a cambio de<br />
remuneración o de cualquier otra retribución. Pornografía infantil es toda<br />
representación, por cualquier medio, de un niño, niña y adolescente en<br />
actividades sexuales explícitas, reales o simuladas; o de sus órganos<br />
genitales, con la finalidad de promover, sugerir o evocar la actividad sexual.<br />
Art. 70.- Concepto de tráfico de niños.- Se entiende por tráfico de<br />
niños, niñas o adolescentes, su sustracción, traslado o retención, dentro o<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 35
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
fuera del país y por cualquier medio, con el propósito de utilizarlos en la<br />
prostitución, explotación sexual o laboral, pornografía, narcotráfico, tráfico de<br />
órganos, servidumbre, adopciones ilegales u otras actividades ilícitas.<br />
Se consideran medios de tráfico, entre otros, la sustitución de persona, el<br />
consentimiento fraudulento o forzado y la entrega o recepción de pagos o<br />
beneficios indebidos dirigidos a lograr el consentimiento de los progenitores,<br />
de las personas o de la institución a cuyo cargo se halla el niño, niña o<br />
adolescente.<br />
Art. 71.- Concepto de pérdida de niños, niñas o adolescentes.- Para<br />
efectos de este Código, se considera pérdida de niños, niñas o adolescentes,<br />
su ausencia voluntaria o involuntaria del hogar, establecimiento educativo u<br />
otro lugar en el que se supone deben permanecer, sin el conocimiento de sus<br />
progenitores o responsables de su cuidado.<br />
Art. 72.- Personas obligadas a denunciar.- Las personas que por su<br />
pr<strong>of</strong>esión u <strong>of</strong>icio tengan conocimiento de un hecho que presente<br />
características propias de maltrato, abuso y explotación sexual, tráfico o<br />
pérdida de que hubiere sido víctima un niño, niña o adolescente, deberán<br />
denunciarlo dentro de las veinticuatro horas siguientes de dicho conocimiento<br />
ante cualquiera de los fiscales, autoridades judiciales o administrativas<br />
competentes, incluida la Defensoría del Pueblo, como entidad garante de los<br />
derechos fundamentales.<br />
Art. 73.- Deber de protección en los casos de maltrato.- Es deber de<br />
todas las personas intervenir en el acto para proteger a un niño, niña o<br />
adolescente en casos flagrantes de maltrato, abuso sexual, tráfico y<br />
explotación sexual y otras violaciones a sus derechos; y requerir la<br />
intervención inmediata de la autoridad administrativa, comunitaria o judicial.<br />
Art. 74.- Prevención y políticas respecto de las materias que trata el<br />
presente título.- El Estado adoptará las medidas legislativas, administrativas,<br />
sociales, educativas y de otra índole, que sean necesarias para proteger a los<br />
niños, niñas y adolescentes contra las conductas y hechos previstos en este<br />
título, e impulsará políticas y programas dirigidos a:<br />
1. La asistencia a la niñez y adolescencia y a las personas responsables<br />
de su cuidado y protección, con el objeto de prevenir estas formas de<br />
violación de derechos;<br />
2. La prevención e investigación de los casos de maltrato, abuso y<br />
explotación sexual, tráfico y pérdida;<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 36
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
3. La búsqueda, recuperación y reinserción familiar, en los casos de<br />
pérdida, plagio, traslado ilegal y tráfico; y,<br />
4. El fomento de una cultura de buen trato en las relaciones cotidianas<br />
entre adultos, niños, niñas y adolescentes.<br />
En el desarrollo de las políticas y programas a los que se refiere este artículo,<br />
se asegurará la participación de la sociedad, la familia, los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes.<br />
Art. 75.- Prevención del maltrato institucional.- El Estado planificará y<br />
pondrá en ejecución medidas administrativas, legislativas, pedagógicas, de<br />
protección, atención, cuidado y demás que sean necesarias, en instituciones<br />
públicas y privadas, con el fin de erradicar toda forma de maltrato y abuso, y<br />
de mejorar las relaciones entre adultos y niños, niñas y adolescentes, y de<br />
éstos entre sí, especialmente en el entorno de su vida cotidiana.<br />
Las prácticas administrativas, pedagógicas, formativas, culturales<br />
tradicionales, de protección, atención, cuidado y de cualquier otra clase que<br />
realice toda institución pública o privada, deben respetar los derechos y<br />
garantías de los niños, niñas y adolescentes, y excluir toda forma de maltrato y<br />
abuso.<br />
Art. 76.- Prácticas culturales de maltrato.- No se admitirá como<br />
justificación de las prácticas a las que se refiere este capítulo, ni de atenuación<br />
para efecto de establecer las responsabilidades consiguientes, la alegación de<br />
que constituyen métodos formativos o que son prácticas culturales<br />
tradicionales.<br />
Art. 77.- Protección contra el traslado y retención ilícitos de niños,<br />
niñas y adolescentes.- Se prohíbe el traslado y la retención de niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes cuando violan el ejercicio de la patria potestad, el régimen de<br />
visitas o las normas sobre autorización para salir del país.<br />
Los niños, niñas y adolescentes que han sido trasladados o retenidos<br />
ilegalmente, tienen derecho a ser reintegrados a su medio familiar y a gozar<br />
de las visitas de sus progenitores y otros parientes de conformidad con lo<br />
previsto en este Código.<br />
El Estado tomará todas las medidas que sean necesarias para lograr el<br />
regreso y reinserción familiar del niño, niña o adolescente que se encuentre en<br />
la situación prevista en este artículo.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 37
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Art. 78.- Derecho a protección contra otras formas de abuso.- Los<br />
niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a que se les brinde protección<br />
contra:<br />
1. El consumo y uso indebido de bebidas alcohólicas, tabaco,<br />
estupefacientes y substancias psicotrópicas;<br />
2. La participación en la producción, comercialización y publicidad de las<br />
substancias y objetos a que se refieren los numerales 1 y 3;<br />
3. El uso de armas, explosivos y substancias que pongan en riesgo su vida<br />
o su integridad personal;<br />
4. La exposición pública de sus enfermedades o discapacidades orgánicas<br />
o funcionales, para la obtención de beneficios económicos; y,<br />
5. La inducción a los juegos de azar.<br />
Art. 79. - Medidas de protección para los casos previstos en este<br />
título.- Para los casos previstos en este título y sin perjuicio de las medidas<br />
generales de protección previstas en este Código y más leyes, las autoridades<br />
administrativas y judiciales competentes ordenarán una o más de las<br />
siguientes medidas:<br />
1. Allanamiento del lugar donde se encuentre el niño, niña o adolescente,<br />
víctima de la práctica ilícita, para su inmediata recuperación. Esta<br />
medida sólo podrá ser decretada por el Juez de la Niñez y Adolescencia,<br />
quien la dispondrá de inmediato y sin formalidad alguna;<br />
2. Custodia familiar o acogimiento institucional;<br />
3. Inserción del niño, niña o adolescente y su familia en un programa de<br />
protección y atención;<br />
4. Concesión de boletas de auxilio a favor del niño, niña o adolescente, en<br />
contra de la persona agresora;<br />
5. Amonestación al agresor;<br />
6. Inserción del agresor en un programa de atención especializada;<br />
7. Orden de salida del agresor de la vivienda, si su convivencia con la<br />
víctima implica un riesgo para la seguridad física, psicológica o sexual<br />
de esta última; y de reingreso de la víctima, si fuere el caso;<br />
8. Prohibición al agresor de acercarse a la víctima o mantener cualquier<br />
tipo de contacto con ella;<br />
9. Prohibición al agresor de pr<strong>of</strong>erir amenazas, en forma directa o indirecta,<br />
contra la víctima o sus parientes;<br />
10. Suspensión del agresor en las tareas o funciones que desempeña;<br />
11. Suspensión del funcionamiento de la entidad o establecimiento donde se<br />
produjo el maltrato institucional, mientras duren las condiciones que<br />
justifican la medida;<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 38
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
12. Participación del agresor o del personal de la institución en la que se<br />
haya producido el maltrato institucional, en talleres, cursos o cualquier<br />
modalidad de eventos formativos; y,<br />
13. Seguimiento por parte de los equipos de trabajo social, para verificar la<br />
rectificación de las conductas de maltrato.<br />
En casos de emergencia que aporten indicios serios de agresión o amenaza<br />
contra la integridad física, sicológica o sexual del niño, niña o adolescente o de<br />
delito flagrante, las entidades de atención autorizadas podrán ejecutar<br />
provisionalmente las medidas de los numerales 2 a 9, 12 y 13, y ponerlo en<br />
conocimiento de la autoridad competente en el plazo máximo de setenta y dos<br />
horas, para que disponga las medidas definitivas.<br />
Art. 80.- Exámenes médico legales.- Los exámenes médico legales a<br />
un niño, niña o adolescente, se practicarán en estrictas condiciones de<br />
confidencialidad y respeto a la intimidad e integridad física y emocional del<br />
paciente.<br />
Salvo que ello sea imprescindible para su tratamiento y recuperación, se<br />
prohíbe volver a someter a un niño; niña o adolescente víctima de alguna de<br />
las formas de maltrato o abuso señalados en este título, a un mismo examen o<br />
reconocimiento médico legal.<br />
Los pr<strong>of</strong>esionales de la salud que realicen estos exámenes, están obligados a<br />
conservar en condiciones de seguridad los elementos de prueba encontrados;<br />
y a rendir testimonio propio sobre el contenido de sus informes.<br />
Los informes de dichos exámenes, realizados por pr<strong>of</strong>esionales de<br />
establecimientos de salud públicos o privados y entidades de atención<br />
autorizadas, tendrán valor legal de informe pericial.<br />
TITULO V<br />
DEL TRABAJO DE NIÑOS, NINAS Y ADOLESCENTES<br />
Capítulo I<br />
Disposiciones Generales<br />
Art. 81.- Derecho a la protección contra la explotación laboral.- Los<br />
niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a que el Estado, la sociedad y la<br />
familia les protejan contra la explotación laboral y económica y cualquier forma<br />
de esclavitud, servidumbre, trabajo forzoso o nocivo para su salud, su<br />
desarrollo físico, mental, espiritual, moral o social, o que pueda entorpecer el<br />
ejercicio de su derecho a la educación.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 39
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Art. 82.- Edad mínima para el trabajo.- Se fija en quince años la edad<br />
mínima para todo tipo de trabajo, incluido el servicio doméstico, con las<br />
salvedades previstas en este Código, más leyes e instrumentos<br />
internacionales con fuerza legal en el país.<br />
La infracción a lo dispuesto en el inciso anterior, no libera al patrono de<br />
cumplir con las obligaciones laborales y sociales que le impone la relación de<br />
trabajo.<br />
El Consejo Nacional de la Niñez y Adolescencia, de <strong>of</strong>icio o a petición de<br />
cualquier entidad pública o privada, podrá autorizar edades mínimas por sobre<br />
la señalada en el inciso anterior, de conformidad con lo establecido en este<br />
Código, la ley y en los instrumentos internacionales legalmente ratificados por<br />
el Ecuador.<br />
Art. 83.- Erradicación del trabajo infantil.- El Estado y la sociedad<br />
deben elaborar y ejecutar políticas, planes, programas y medidas de<br />
protección tendientes a erradicar el trabajo de los niños, niñas y de los<br />
adolescentes que no han cumplido quince años. La familia debe contribuir al<br />
logro de este objetivo.<br />
Art. 84. - Jornada de trabajo y educación.- Por ningún motivo la<br />
jornada de trabajo de los adolescentes podrá exceder de seis horas diarias<br />
durante un período máximo de cinco días a la semana; y se organizará de<br />
manera que no limite el efectivo ejercicio de su derecho a la educación.<br />
Los progenitores del adolescente que trabaja, los responsables de su<br />
cuidado, sus patronos y las personas para quienes realizan una actividad<br />
productiva, tienen la obligación de velar porque terminen su educación básica<br />
y cumplan sus deberes académicos.<br />
Art. 85.- Registro de adolescentes trabajadores.- El Ministerio de<br />
Trabajo llevará un registro de los adolescentes que trabajan por cantones,<br />
debiendo remitir la información periódicamente a los concejos cantonales de la<br />
Niñez y Adolescencia.<br />
El reglamento establecerá la forma de llevar dicho registro y los datos que<br />
deben registrarse.<br />
Art. 86.- Excepción relativa a los trabajos formativos realizados<br />
como prácticas culturales.- La limitación de edad señalada en el artículo 82<br />
no se aplicará a los trabajos considerados como prácticas ancestrales<br />
formativas, siempre que reúnan las siguientes condiciones.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 40
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
1. Que respeten el desarrollo físico y psicológico del adolescente, en el<br />
sentido de asignárseles solamente tareas acordes con sus capacidades<br />
y etapa evolutiva;<br />
2. Que contribuyan a la formación y desarrollo de las destrezas y<br />
habilidades del adolescente;<br />
3. Que transmitan valores y normas culturales en armonía con el desarrollo<br />
del adolescente; y,<br />
4. Que se desarrollen en el ámbito y beneficio de la comunidad a la que<br />
pertenece el adolescente o su familia.<br />
Art. 87.- Trabajos prohibidos.- Se prohíbe el trabajo de adolescentes:<br />
1. En minas, basurales, camales, canteras e industrias extractivas de<br />
cualquier clase;<br />
2. En actividades que implican la manipulación de substancias explosivas,<br />
psicotrópicas, tóxicas, peligrosas o nocivas para su vida, su desarrollo<br />
físico o mental y su salud;<br />
3. En prostíbulos o zonas de tolerancia, lugares de juegos de azar,<br />
expendio de bebidas alcohólicas y otros que puedan ser inconvenientes<br />
para el desarrollo moral o social del adolescente;<br />
4. En actividades que requieran el empleo de maquinaria peligrosa o que lo<br />
exponen a ruidos que exceden los límites legales de tolerancia;<br />
5. En una actividad que pueda agravar la discapacidad, tratándose de<br />
adolescentes que la tengan;<br />
6. En las demás actividades prohibidas en otros cuerpos legales, incluidos<br />
los instrumentos internacionales ratificados por el Ecuador; y,<br />
7. En hogares cuyos, miembros tengan antecedentes como autores de<br />
abuso o maltrato.<br />
El Consejo Nacional de la Niñez y Adolescencia determinará las formas<br />
específicas de trabajo peligroso, nocivo o riesgoso que están prohibidos para<br />
los adolescentes, tomando en cuenta su naturaleza, condiciones y riesgo para<br />
su vida e integridad personal, salud, educación, seguridad y desarrollo integral.<br />
Capítulo II<br />
Trabajo en relación de dependencia<br />
Art. 88.- Formas del contrato de trabajo.- El contrato individual de<br />
trabajo de los adolescentes se celebrará por escrito y se registrará en el<br />
Municipio y en la Inspección del Trabajo de la respectiva jurisdicción.<br />
El patrono tiene la obligación de registrar el contrato de trabajo en el plazo de<br />
treinta días, sin perjuicio del derecho del adolescente para solicitar por sí<br />
mismo dicho registro.<br />
A falta de contrato escrito, el adolescente podrá probar la relación laboral por<br />
cualquier medio, incluso el juramento deferido.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 41
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Siempre que una persona se beneficie del trabajo de un adolescente; se<br />
presume, para todos los efectos legales, la existencia de una relación laboral.<br />
Art. 89.- Derechos laborales y sociales.- Los adolescentes que<br />
trabajan bajo relación de dependencia, disfrutan de todos los derechos y<br />
beneficios, individuales y colectivos, que contemplan las leyes laborales, de<br />
seguridad social y educación; más los derechos específicos contemplados en<br />
el presente Código.<br />
Art. 90.- De los aprendices.- En los contratos de aprendizaje constará<br />
una cláusula sobre los mecanismos de transferencia al adolescente, de los<br />
conocimientos del <strong>of</strong>icio, arte o forma de trabajo. Estos contratos no durarán<br />
más de dos años, en el caso del trabajo artesanal, y seis meses, en el trabajo<br />
industrial u otro tipo de trabajo.<br />
Los patronos garantizarán especialmente el ejercicio de los derechos de<br />
educación, salud y descanso de sus aprendices.<br />
En ningún caso la remuneración del adolescente aprendiz será inferior al 80%<br />
de la remuneración que corresponde al adulto para este tipo de trabajo, arte u<br />
<strong>of</strong>icio.<br />
Art. 91.- Trabajo doméstico.- Los adolescentes que trabajen en el<br />
servicio doméstico tendrán los mismos derechos y garantías que los<br />
adolescentes trabajadores en general.<br />
El patrono velará por la integridad física, psicológica y moral del adolescente y<br />
garantizará sus derechos a la alimentación, educación, salud, descanso y<br />
recreación.<br />
Art. 92.- Trabajo formativo.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes podrán<br />
realizar actividades de formación que incorporen al trabajo como un elemento<br />
importante en su formación integral. Estas actividades deberán realizarse en<br />
condiciones adecuadas para su edad, capacidad, estado físico y desarrollo<br />
intelectual, respetando sus valores morales y culturales, sus derechos al<br />
descanso, recreación y juego.<br />
Los programas que incorporen al trabajo con la finalidad señalada en este<br />
artículo, darán prioridad a las exigencias pedagógicas relacionadas con el<br />
desarrollo integral del niño, niña o adolescente, por sobre los objetivos<br />
productivos.<br />
Capítulo III<br />
Trabajo sin relación de dependencia<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 42
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Art. 93.- Trabajo por cuenta propia.- Los municipios otorgarán, en sus<br />
respectivas jurisdicciones, los permisos para que los adolescentes que hayan<br />
cumplido quince años ejerzan actividades económicas por cuenta propia,<br />
siempre que no sean de aquellas consideradas como perjudiciales o nocivas o<br />
que se encuentren prohibidas en este u otros cuerpos legales.<br />
Cada Municipio llevará un registro de estas autorizaciones y controlará el<br />
desarrollo de las actividades autorizadas a los adolescentes.<br />
Los adolescentes autorizados de conformidad con el inciso anterior, recibirán<br />
del Municipio un carné laboral que les proporcionará los siguientes beneficios:<br />
acceso gratuito a los espectáculos públicos que determine el reglamento,<br />
acceso preferente a programas de protección tales como comedores<br />
populares, servicios médicos, albergues nocturnos, matrícula gratuita y<br />
exención de otros pagos en los centros educativos fiscales y municipales.<br />
El Consejo Nacional de la Niñez y Adolescencia dictará el Reglamento para la<br />
emisión del carné laboral y la regulación de los beneficios que otorga.<br />
Capítulo IV<br />
De las medidas de protección y de las sanciones relacionadas con el<br />
trabajo<br />
Art. 94.- Medidas de protección.- En los casos de infracción a las<br />
disposiciones del presente título, los jueces y autoridades administrativas<br />
competentes podrán ordenar una o más de las siguientes medidas de<br />
protección a favor de los niños, niñas y adolescentes afectados, sin perjuicio<br />
de las demás contempladas en este Código:<br />
1. La orden de separar al niño, niña o adolescente de la actividad laboral;<br />
2. La inserción del niño, niña o adolescente y/o su familia, en un programa<br />
de protección; y,<br />
3. La separación temporal del medio familiar del niño, niña, adolescente o<br />
agresor, según sea el caso.<br />
Se adoptarán las providencias necesarias para que la aplicación de estas<br />
medidas no afecte los derechos y garantías de los niños, niñas y<br />
adolescentes, más allá de las restricciones inherentes a cada una de ellas; y<br />
para asegurar el sustento diario del niño, niña o adolescente, de una manera<br />
compatible con su derecho a una vida digna.<br />
Art. 95.- Sanciones aplicables por violación a las disposiciones<br />
referentes al trabajo.- La violación de las prohibiciones contenidas en este<br />
título, será reprimida con una o más de las siguientes sanciones, sin perjuicio<br />
de las contempladas en otros cuerpos legales:<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 43
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
1. Amonestación a los progenitores o a las personas encargadas del<br />
cuidado del niño, niña o adolescente; y a quienes los empleen o se<br />
beneficien directamente con su trabajo;<br />
2. Multa de cincuenta a trescientos dólares, si los infractores son los<br />
progenitores o responsables del cuidado del niño, niña o adolescente;<br />
3. Multa de doscientos a mil dólares, si se trata del empleador o cualquier<br />
persona que se beneficie directa o indirectamente del trabajo del niño,<br />
niña o adolescente; y,<br />
4. Clausura del establecimiento donde se realiza el trabajo, en caso de<br />
reincidencia.<br />
PLANNING<br />
The action or <strong>process</strong> <strong>of</strong> making plan for something<br />
THE THREE ELEMENTS OF PLANNING<br />
Long term plans called key stage plans (Macro-Planning)<br />
There are different ways <strong>of</strong> describing long-term plans. For <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se<br />
materials, a long-term plan is <strong>the</strong> planned programmed <strong>of</strong> work for a subject<br />
across <strong>the</strong> school, covering one or more key stages.<br />
Long-term <strong>planning</strong> for a subject happens in <strong>the</strong> context <strong>of</strong> a school's overall<br />
curriculum plan (<strong>the</strong> long-term planned program <strong>of</strong> work in all subjects covering<br />
every year group in a school). Schools develop <strong>the</strong>ir own individual curriculum<br />
plans to reflect <strong>the</strong>ir context and characteristics, as well as <strong>the</strong>ir values, aims<br />
and priorities.<br />
A long-term plan shows how units <strong>of</strong> work in a subject are sequenced and<br />
distributed across years and key stages. Schools make decisions about <strong>the</strong><br />
order and timing <strong>of</strong> units in a subject, focusing on curriculum continuity and<br />
progression in pupils' <strong>learning</strong>. These decisions might change from year to year<br />
to take into account new initiatives or o<strong>the</strong>r changes. Many schools also identify<br />
opportunities to highlight important links with work in o<strong>the</strong>r subjects in <strong>the</strong>ir longterm<br />
plans.<br />
Medium term plans (unit, topics or enquiries) (Meso-Planning)<br />
There are different ways <strong>of</strong> describing medium-term plans. For <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>se materials, a medium-term plan is a planned sequence <strong>of</strong> work for a<br />
subject (or for more than one subject) for a period <strong>of</strong> weeks, such as a half term<br />
or term, or for a number <strong>of</strong> lessons.<br />
Medium-term <strong>planning</strong> focuses on organizing coherent units <strong>of</strong> work. Mediumterm<br />
plans identify <strong>learning</strong> objectives and outcomes and indicate <strong>the</strong> activities<br />
that will enable <strong>the</strong>se to be achieved. They usually show a sequence <strong>of</strong><br />
[Escribir texto] Página 44
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
activities that will promote progression and some information about <strong>the</strong> amount<br />
<strong>of</strong> time needed to cover <strong>the</strong> objectives (whe<strong>the</strong>r in blocked periods or regular<br />
lessons over a period <strong>of</strong> weeks).<br />
Short term plan, also called lesson-or weekly plans (Micro-Planning)<br />
There are different ways <strong>of</strong> describing short-term plans. For <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>se materials, a short-term plan is a set <strong>of</strong> activities for a week, a day, or a<br />
lesson.<br />
Short-term <strong>planning</strong> is based on <strong>the</strong> needs <strong>of</strong> individual schools and teachers.<br />
Teachers <strong>of</strong>ten use short-term plans to think through <strong>the</strong> structure and content<br />
<strong>of</strong> a lesson and to note information such as key questions, resources,<br />
differentiation and assessment opportunities, especially where this is not<br />
already included in <strong>the</strong> medium-term plan.<br />
Many teachers use lesson plans selectively, for particular activities or subjects,<br />
ra<strong>the</strong>r than for every lesson. Experienced teachers <strong>of</strong>ten work direct from a<br />
medium-term plan and make notes as and when needed to support <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
<strong>teaching</strong>.<br />
LESSON PLANNING AND USE OR RESOURCES FOR<br />
LANGUAGE TEACHING<br />
Planning and preparing a lesson or sequence <strong>of</strong><br />
lessons<br />
Identifying and selecting aims<br />
How do we identify and select aims?<br />
Aims are what we want learners to learn or be able to do at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> a lesson,<br />
a sequence (i.e. a series) <strong>of</strong> lessons or a whole course. Aims may focus, for<br />
example, on a function or a grammatical structure, on <strong>the</strong> vocabulary <strong>of</strong> a<br />
particular topic or on developing a <strong>language</strong> skill. Aims, especially for younger<br />
learners, may not always focus on particular areas <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong>. The aim <strong>of</strong> a<br />
lesson may also be listening to a story for pleasure or encouraging a positive<br />
attitude towards <strong>the</strong> foreign <strong>language</strong>. To identify and select <strong>the</strong> most<br />
appropriate aims, we need to ask ourselves two questions:<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 45
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
What do my learners already know?<br />
What do <strong>the</strong>y need to know?<br />
The answers to <strong>the</strong>se questions will help us to make sure that <strong>the</strong> aims are <strong>the</strong><br />
right ones for a particular group <strong>of</strong> learners at a particular time.<br />
• Key concepts<br />
Look at <strong>the</strong> table. Can you work out what <strong>the</strong> difference is between main arms,<br />
subsidiary aims and personal aims?<br />
Maim aim Subsidiary aims Personal aims<br />
To practice making<br />
polite requests in <strong>the</strong><br />
context <strong>of</strong><br />
making holiday<br />
arrangements.<br />
Example exponent:<br />
Could you give me some<br />
information about<br />
hotels?<br />
Grammar: to revise modal auxiliary<br />
verbs.<br />
Functional exponents: Could/Would<br />
you...?<br />
Vocabulary: to consolidate lexis for<br />
travel, accommodation.<br />
Phonology: to focus on intonation.<br />
Speaking: to give controlled oral<br />
practice<br />
To improve<br />
my<br />
organization<br />
<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
whiteboard; to<br />
give clearer<br />
examples.<br />
A main aim, like <strong>the</strong> one above, describes <strong>the</strong> most important thing we want to<br />
achieve in a lesson or sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons. For example, we may want<br />
learners to understand and practice using new <strong>language</strong>; to reinforce or<br />
consolidate (i.e. to make stronger) <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y already know by<br />
giving <strong>the</strong>m fur<strong>the</strong>r practice; or to revise <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y have recently learnt. On<br />
a lesson plan <strong>the</strong> main aim should also include an example <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> target<br />
<strong>language</strong> we are <strong>planning</strong> to teach.<br />
As well as a main aim, a lesson may also have subsidiary aims. Subsidiary<br />
aims show <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> or skills learners must be able to use well in order to<br />
achieve <strong>the</strong> main aim <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson. In <strong>the</strong> example on page 86, <strong>the</strong> main aim is<br />
to practice making polite requests; <strong>the</strong> subsidiary aims describe <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />
and skill that learners will need to make <strong>the</strong>se requests. Stating both main and<br />
subsidiary aims is a good way <strong>of</strong> making sure that our lesson plan focuses on<br />
what we want our learners to learn, or to be able to do. It enables us to see how<br />
<strong>the</strong> lesson should develop, from one stage (or part) to <strong>the</strong> next, building up our<br />
learners' knowledge or skills in <strong>the</strong> best possible order.<br />
In addition to <strong>learning</strong> aims for <strong>the</strong> learners, we may also want to think about<br />
our own personal aims as teachers. Personal aims show what we would like to<br />
improve or focus on in our own <strong>teaching</strong>. Like <strong>the</strong> ones in <strong>the</strong> table on page 86,<br />
<strong>the</strong>se might be about improving <strong>the</strong> way that we handle aids and materials or<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 46
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
particular <strong>teaching</strong> techniques, or <strong>the</strong>y might be about our relationship with <strong>the</strong><br />
learners. Here are some more examples:<br />
• To try different correction techniques<br />
• To remember to check instructions<br />
• To write more dearly on <strong>the</strong> blackboard/whiteboard<br />
• To make more use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> phonemic chart (a poster with phonemic symbols)<br />
• To get learners to work with different partners o to get quieter learners to<br />
answer questions.<br />
Identifying and selecting aims are <strong>the</strong> first steps in <strong>planning</strong> a lesson. Once we<br />
have decided on <strong>the</strong> aims, we can design or select <strong>the</strong> most appropriate<br />
activities, put <strong>the</strong>m in <strong>the</strong> best order and choose <strong>the</strong> most suitable <strong>teaching</strong> aids<br />
(things we can use to support our <strong>teaching</strong> in <strong>the</strong> classroom) and materials.<br />
After <strong>the</strong> lesson, we can look back at this part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> plan to see whe<strong>the</strong>r we<br />
have achieved our aims, i.e. whe<strong>the</strong>r we have succeeded in <strong>teaching</strong> what we<br />
planned to teach. This also helps us to select <strong>the</strong> most appropriate aims for<br />
future lessons.<br />
• Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The syllabus (I.e. <strong>the</strong> course programme) and/or <strong>the</strong> coursebook will give us<br />
a general direction for <strong>planning</strong> our <strong>teaching</strong>. To decide on specific aims for<br />
a particular lesson, however, we should think about our learners' needs and<br />
<strong>the</strong> stage <strong>the</strong>y have reached in <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>learning</strong>.<br />
We can identify and select appropriate personal aims in a similar way, i.e. by<br />
looking back at earlier lessons we have taught and thinking about things that<br />
worked well and things we want to improve.<br />
We should not confuse aims and procedures. Aims describe what <strong>the</strong><br />
learners will learn or what <strong>the</strong>y will be able to do with <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong>, while<br />
procedures - for example, listening to a recording and answering questions<br />
about it - are what <strong>the</strong> teacher and learners will do at each stage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
lesson.<br />
Aims should not be too general. 'To teach <strong>the</strong> past simple' or 'to develop<br />
learners' reading skills' do not say enough about <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />
More specific aims might be 'to introduce and practice <strong>the</strong> past simple for<br />
talking about personal experiences' or 'to give learners practice in predicting<br />
content, scanning for specific information and guessing meaning from<br />
context'.<br />
We shouldn't plan to do too much in a lesson. The amount we plan to cover<br />
will depend on <strong>the</strong> length <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> learners' level.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 47
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
<br />
<br />
Learners also need to know what <strong>the</strong> lesson is going to be about. It is <strong>of</strong>ten<br />
helpful to announce our aims (or to write <strong>the</strong>m up on <strong>the</strong> board) at <strong>the</strong><br />
beginning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson, and/or to repeat <strong>the</strong>m at <strong>the</strong> end.<br />
Learners <strong>of</strong> all ages find it helpful to know why <strong>the</strong>y are doing things. For<br />
younger learners <strong>the</strong> aims <strong>of</strong> a lesson can be described in very simple<br />
<strong>language</strong>, focusing on <strong>the</strong> things <strong>the</strong>y will do in <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />
knowledge <strong>the</strong>y will take away from it. (For example: ´Today we're going to<br />
read a story and learn how to describe people in English'.)<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITY<br />
The procedures in <strong>the</strong> table below show a sequence <strong>of</strong> activities for a lesson<br />
with <strong>the</strong> main aim <strong>of</strong> developing intermediate students' confidence and skill in<br />
informal conversation. The subsidiary aims| for <strong>the</strong> lesson (A-H) are in <strong>the</strong><br />
wrong order. Put <strong>the</strong>m in <strong>the</strong> right order so that <strong>the</strong>y match <strong>the</strong> correct<br />
procedures.<br />
Procedure<br />
1 Students move around <strong>the</strong> classroom to find<br />
students with matching halves <strong>of</strong> sentences.<br />
2 They talk in pairs about what <strong>the</strong>y find difficult<br />
in listening to informal conversation.<br />
3 They hear an informal conversation and<br />
identify speakers, place and situation.<br />
4 They listen again and fill in missing phrases in<br />
<strong>the</strong> transcript.<br />
5 Repetition drill: students practice key phrases.<br />
Pairs practice simple two-line exchanges using<br />
key phrases.<br />
6 Pairs write and practice <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />
conversation from role cards, using key phrases<br />
where possible. Several pairs perform and<br />
record conversations.<br />
7 Class comment and suggest improvements to<br />
grammar and vocabulary.<br />
Subsidiary aims<br />
A • to give students fluency practice<br />
• to practice using target <strong>language</strong> in a<br />
meaningful context<br />
B- to develop peer correction skills<br />
C • to listen for detailed information<br />
• to focus students' attention on target<br />
<strong>language</strong><br />
D • to practice gist listening<br />
• to create a context<br />
E • to get students actively involved<br />
• to put students into pairs<br />
F • to give students confidence in speaking<br />
through controlled practice<br />
G • to review <strong>the</strong> whole lesson<br />
• to give <strong>the</strong> teacher feedback<br />
8 Students discuss what <strong>the</strong>y have learnt. H • to raise awareness <strong>of</strong> what <strong>the</strong> lesson aim<br />
will be<br />
• to encourage personal involvement<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 48
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />
1. I <strong>of</strong>ten discover what my aims are while I am <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />
Sometimes I only find out when <strong>the</strong> lesson is over.<br />
2. Learners don't want to know about aims. They just want to get on with<br />
<strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />
3. My coursebook always tells me what my aims should be.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-7 match <strong>the</strong> stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson with <strong>the</strong> subsidiary aims<br />
listed A-H. There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />
Lesson summaries<br />
1. Learners put jumbled sections <strong>of</strong> a text in order. The teacher focuses on<br />
conjunctions, time expressions, pronouns, etc. learners make notes on a<br />
similar topic, and <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong>y produce a similar text.<br />
2. Learners look at a town map and discuss <strong>the</strong> best route from <strong>the</strong> station<br />
to a hotel, and <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong>y listen to a conversation on cassette and<br />
compare <strong>the</strong>ir route with <strong>the</strong> one on <strong>the</strong> cassette.<br />
3. In pairs learners read different text about soldiers duties and <strong>the</strong>y<br />
exchange information about <strong>the</strong>m. Pair work toge<strong>the</strong>r to complete lists <strong>of</strong><br />
rules for soldiers, using must, should, doesn´t, don’t, have to.<br />
4. Learners brainstorm vocabulary and ideas on <strong>the</strong> topic, and <strong>the</strong>n in<br />
groups <strong>the</strong>y draft <strong>the</strong> text for a leaflet to advertise <strong>the</strong>ir town to tourist.<br />
Groups <strong>the</strong>n exchange text to make corrections and / or suggest<br />
improvements.<br />
5. Learners listen to a dialogue and identify <strong>the</strong> tense <strong>the</strong> speakers use top<br />
talk about future arrangements. The teacher check understanding.<br />
Learners do repetitions drills, and <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong>y practice using <strong>the</strong> structure<br />
in a guided role play.<br />
6. Learners work in large groups to brain storm ideas on different roles and<br />
<strong>the</strong>n form new groups for a role-based discussion. The teacher monitors<br />
<strong>the</strong> discussion<br />
7. Learners match words with pictures and build up word maps, wich <strong>the</strong>y<br />
compare and develop. Then <strong>the</strong>y work toge<strong>the</strong>r to produce entries for a<br />
class dictionary.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 49
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Lesson aims<br />
A. To practice listening for details<br />
B. To practice writing for a communicative purpose<br />
C. To present and provide controlled practice <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> present progressive<br />
D. To revise and practice modal auxiliary verbs<br />
E. To train learners to learn autonomously<br />
F. To give learners oral fluency practice<br />
G. To raise awareness <strong>of</strong> how to join sentences and paragraphs<br />
H. To revise and consolidate vocabulary.<br />
Identifying <strong>the</strong> different components <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan<br />
• How do we identify <strong>the</strong> different components <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan?<br />
Choose <strong>the</strong> comparison that you think best describes a lesson plan.<br />
A lesson plan is like ... an instruction leaflet a photograph a story a road map<br />
a computer program a series <strong>of</strong> road signs a written summary something else?<br />
A lesson plan is a set <strong>of</strong> notes that helps us to think through what we are going<br />
to teach and how we are going to teach it. It also guides us during and after <strong>the</strong><br />
lesson. We can identify <strong>the</strong> most important components <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan by<br />
thinking carefully about what we want our learners to do and how we want <strong>the</strong>m<br />
to do it.<br />
The main components <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan show us what <strong>the</strong> lesson is for (<strong>the</strong><br />
aims) and what <strong>the</strong> teacher and <strong>the</strong> learners will do during <strong>the</strong> lesson and how<br />
<strong>the</strong>y will do it (<strong>the</strong> procedures). O<strong>the</strong>r components help us to think about<br />
possible problems and remind us <strong>of</strong> things we need to remember about <strong>the</strong><br />
learners. So a lesson plan is most like a road map or a series <strong>of</strong> road signs, i.e.<br />
something that shows us where we are going and how we are going to get <strong>the</strong>re<br />
- although we may sometimes find that during <strong>the</strong> journey we have to take a<br />
different route!<br />
Here are some ways a lesson plan helps <strong>the</strong> teacher.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 50
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Before <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
During <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
After <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
Writing down <strong>the</strong> aims and <strong>the</strong> procedures for each stage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
lesson helps us to make sure that we have planned <strong>the</strong> best<br />
possible sequence to enable us to achieve those aims.<br />
The plan can also help <strong>the</strong> teacher to check tinning— <strong>the</strong> amount<br />
<strong>of</strong> time we plan for each stage - and to check that <strong>the</strong> lesson is<br />
following <strong>the</strong> sequence we decided on.<br />
We can keep <strong>the</strong> plan as a record <strong>of</strong> what happened, making any<br />
changes necessary to show how <strong>the</strong> lesson was different from <strong>the</strong><br />
plan. We can <strong>the</strong>n use <strong>the</strong> plan and notes to help plan <strong>the</strong> next<br />
lesson. (At this stage, <strong>the</strong> plan may be more like a photograph, a<br />
story or a summary, giving us a record <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.)<br />
• Key concepts<br />
A lesson plan can include <strong>the</strong> following headings. Which ones do you think<br />
should always appear? Which ones may only appear sometimes?<br />
Lesson plan headings<br />
Level and number <strong>of</strong><br />
learners<br />
Timetable fit<br />
Main aim(s)<br />
Subsidiary aims<br />
Personal aims<br />
Assumptions<br />
Anticipated <strong>language</strong><br />
problems<br />
Possible solutions<br />
Teaching aids, materials,<br />
equipment<br />
Procedures<br />
Timing<br />
Interaction patterns<br />
Homework<br />
who we are <strong>planning</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson for<br />
how <strong>the</strong> lesson is connected to <strong>the</strong> last lesson and/or <strong>the</strong> next<br />
one<br />
what we want learners to learn or to be able to do by <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r things we want learners to be able to do during <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
because <strong>the</strong>y lead to <strong>the</strong> main aim<br />
aspects <strong>of</strong> our own <strong>teaching</strong> we want to develop or improve<br />
what we think learners already know or can already do related to<br />
<strong>the</strong> aims<br />
things that learners may find difficult<br />
action we will take to deal with <strong>the</strong> anticipated problems<br />
useful reminders <strong>of</strong> things to take to <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
tasks and activities for each stage<br />
length <strong>of</strong> time needed for each stage<br />
ways in which learners work at different stages, i.e. individually,<br />
in pairs, in groups, as a whole class<br />
It is usually a good idea to anticipate possible problems and solutions, but in a<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 51
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
revision lesson we may not need <strong>the</strong>se headings. Also, we may not have<br />
personal aims for every lesson, and we may not always give learners<br />
homework!<br />
• Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
Look carefully at this example <strong>of</strong> part <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan which aims to introduce<br />
and practice <strong>language</strong> for giving advice. Then read <strong>the</strong> points below.<br />
Timing Procedure Subsidiary aims<br />
Aids and<br />
materials<br />
Interaction<br />
pattern<br />
5 minutes<br />
Ask students who<br />
<strong>the</strong>y ask for<br />
advice if <strong>the</strong>y<br />
have a problem.<br />
Warmer/lead-in: to<br />
get students talking<br />
and introduce<br />
<strong>the</strong> topic<br />
- Pairwork<br />
10 minutes<br />
Discuss typical<br />
problems for young<br />
people; elicit<br />
<strong>language</strong> to ask for<br />
and give advice.<br />
To create context<br />
To revise modal<br />
auxiliary verbs<br />
To elicit/introduce<br />
vocabulary<br />
Magazine<br />
pictures<br />
Whiteboard<br />
Teacher →<br />
whole class<br />
5 minutes<br />
Show headlines for<br />
students to guess<br />
<strong>the</strong> content <strong>of</strong><br />
letters to <strong>the</strong> advice<br />
page in a teen<br />
magazine<br />
To get students<br />
ready for reading<br />
To predict content<br />
To use students'<br />
own knowledge<br />
OHP<br />
Teacher→<br />
whole class<br />
15 minutes<br />
Students read<br />
different mini-texts.<br />
<strong>the</strong>n summarise <strong>the</strong><br />
content <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
letters.<br />
To check predictions<br />
Intensive reading<br />
To introduce <strong>the</strong><br />
structure 'If I were<br />
you, I'd...'<br />
Photocopies <strong>of</strong><br />
six problem page<br />
letters<br />
1st group work<br />
↓<br />
2nd group work<br />
(new groups)<br />
• When we make a lesson plan, we need to ask ourselves how <strong>the</strong><br />
procedures we have planned will help to achieve our aims and to make sure<br />
<strong>the</strong>re are strong connections between <strong>the</strong> different stages.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 52
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
• We also need to consider variety/ i.e. how we can use different activity<br />
types, <strong>language</strong> skills and interaction patterns. Learners <strong>of</strong> all ages need<br />
different activities in a lesson, but this is especially important for younger<br />
learners.<br />
• During <strong>the</strong> lesson we should teach <strong>the</strong> learners, not <strong>the</strong> lesson plan! We<br />
must be prepared, if necessary, to change our plan while we are <strong>teaching</strong>. If<br />
we have a dear plan, we will be more aware <strong>of</strong> what we are changing and<br />
why. We can include some different possibilities in a lesson plan, e.g. an<br />
extra activity to use if learners take less time than expected to complete a<br />
task, and this can help if we are not sure how well parts <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> plan will work.<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITY<br />
Some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher's notes for this lesson plan are missing. Put <strong>the</strong> notes A-E<br />
in <strong>the</strong> correct places in <strong>the</strong> plan.<br />
Lesson plan headings<br />
Teacher's notes<br />
Timetable fit 1<br />
Main aim(s) 2<br />
Subsidiary aim(s)<br />
3 To listen for detail to a model story<br />
Personal aim(s) 4<br />
Assumptions<br />
5 Students can already form tenses accurately<br />
Anticipated <strong>language</strong> problems 6 Students may use present tenses<br />
Possible solution 7<br />
Procedures 8<br />
A. To enable students to use past tenses accurately and put events in order in<br />
simple narratives<br />
B. Students listen to <strong>the</strong> model story, <strong>the</strong>n in groups, plan and write <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />
stories<br />
C. Use gestures to remind students to use past tenses<br />
D. To follow on from work on past tenses and to prepare for <strong>the</strong> storytelling<br />
project<br />
E. To make sure that board writing is dear and readable<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />
1 Written lesson plans are helpful when you first start <strong>teaching</strong>, but<br />
experienced teachers don't need <strong>the</strong>m. I plan all my lessons in my head.<br />
2 Lesson plans don't help me teach because I always try to respond to<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 53
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
learners' needs during <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />
3 Writing a lesson plan is <strong>the</strong> important thing. I always have a written plan, but<br />
<strong>of</strong>ten I don't look at it while I'm <strong>teaching</strong>.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-7 match <strong>the</strong> stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson with <strong>the</strong> subsidiary aims<br />
listed A-H. There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />
Lesson stages<br />
1. Check vocabulary from <strong>the</strong> last lesson.<br />
2. Introduce <strong>the</strong> topic and elicit / present new words and phrases.<br />
3. Learners reorder jumbled paragraphs <strong>of</strong> a text.<br />
4. Learners match words in <strong>the</strong> text with possible meanings.<br />
5. Learners answer true or false questions.<br />
6. Learners underline examples <strong>of</strong> report speech.<br />
7. Learners exchange text and give feedback.<br />
Subsidiary<br />
A. Focus on form.<br />
B. Deducing meaning from context.<br />
C. Peer correction.<br />
D. Check detailed comprehension.<br />
E. Contextualize and pre-teach vocabulary.<br />
F. Check learners awareness <strong>of</strong> text organization (pronouns, linking, etc)<br />
G. Controlled practice <strong>of</strong> target structure.<br />
H. Revise <strong>language</strong> already learnt.<br />
Planning an individual lesson or a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons<br />
• How do we plan an individual lesson or a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons?<br />
When we plan an individual lesson, we need to think about its aims, <strong>the</strong> 'shape'<br />
<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> kind <strong>of</strong> techniques that are most appropriate for a<br />
particular group <strong>of</strong> learners. For example, if we are introducing a new<br />
grammatical structure, we might choose a Presentation, Practice and<br />
Production (PPP) approach or a Task-based Learning (TBL) approach. Skills<br />
lessons, too, have regular shapes that we can use to organize lesson plans: for<br />
example, for receptive skills, we usually plan tasks or activities for learners to do<br />
before, while and after reading or listening; for productive skills, <strong>the</strong>re is usually<br />
an introductory stage to set <strong>the</strong> scene (i.e. to explain <strong>the</strong> context) and a<br />
feedback stage after <strong>the</strong> speaking or writing activity.<br />
We also need to think about <strong>the</strong> connections between <strong>the</strong> aims <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
and <strong>the</strong> procedures we will use to achieve those aims. The available materials,<br />
<strong>the</strong> length <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> information we have about our learners will all<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 54
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
help us to identify possible procedures. But <strong>the</strong> most important thing is to make<br />
sure that <strong>the</strong> materials, tasks and activities we select are <strong>the</strong> ones that will help<br />
a particular group <strong>of</strong> learners to achieve <strong>the</strong> aim we have identified.<br />
A sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons is a number <strong>of</strong> related lessons that develop <strong>language</strong><br />
knowledge and/or <strong>language</strong> skills over a period <strong>of</strong> time. Sequences may<br />
develop a single topic or <strong>language</strong> area, or may involve topics or <strong>language</strong><br />
areas that are very closely connected. Here are three examples:<br />
Structural sequence Integrated skills<br />
sequence<br />
1 revision: past simple 1 vocabulary development:<br />
2 revision: present perfect describing places<br />
3 contrast: past simple vs. (function: describing)<br />
present perfect<br />
2 reading: choosing a<br />
holiday<br />
3 writing: letter to a friend<br />
narrating holiday<br />
experiences (function:<br />
narrating)<br />
Project work<br />
1 reading and listening<br />
about free time activities<br />
2 class survey and<br />
research: sport and<br />
entertainment<br />
3 preparation <strong>of</strong> a poster<br />
display to show results <strong>of</strong><br />
survey<br />
<br />
Key Concepts<br />
Planning an individual lesson<br />
When we plan an individual lesson, we have to ask ourselves a number <strong>of</strong><br />
questions:<br />
• Will <strong>the</strong> topic be interesting and motivating for my learners?<br />
• Are <strong>the</strong> activities and <strong>teaching</strong> materials at <strong>the</strong> right level for all <strong>the</strong> learners?<br />
• Have I planned enough for <strong>the</strong> time available? Do I need any extra material?<br />
• Have I planned too much for <strong>the</strong> time available? Are <strong>the</strong>re any stages I can<br />
cut if necessary?<br />
• Have I thought about exactly how to start and end <strong>the</strong> lesson?<br />
• Does each step in <strong>the</strong> lesson help to achieve <strong>the</strong> aim?<br />
Planning a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons<br />
Look at <strong>the</strong>se three teachers' schemes <strong>of</strong> work (i.e. outline plans) for a<br />
sequence <strong>of</strong> four lessons. What do you think might be <strong>the</strong> advantages and<br />
disadvantages <strong>of</strong> each scheme?<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 55
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Scheme A Scheme B Scheme C<br />
Week 3 Grammar Grammar revision (past Class discussion <strong>of</strong> advantages and<br />
Vocabulary tenses)<br />
disadvantages <strong>of</strong> living in <strong>the</strong> city<br />
Vocabulary (free time Revise and extend vocabulary<br />
activities)<br />
Focus on comparative and superlative adjectives<br />
Practice exercise (from and adverbs; practice exercise<br />
coursebook)<br />
Week 4 Listening Check vocabulary<br />
Reading: personal stories: students order<br />
Speaking Reading (emails)<br />
sections <strong>of</strong> text<br />
Speaking -fluency activities Focus on text organization<br />
Writing: students' own stories<br />
Peer correction (where students correct one<br />
ano<strong>the</strong>r)<br />
Week 5 Reading Quick revision: work from Listening: song -group transcription<br />
Writing Weeks 3 and 4<br />
Grammar game (snakes and ladders) to revise<br />
Listening (e.g. holiday story) work on comparatives and superlatives<br />
Grammar focus (reported Pronunciation practice: focus on /a/<br />
speech)<br />
Writing (report <strong>of</strong> story)<br />
Week 6 Test Speaking (role-play) Review <strong>of</strong> grammar and topic<br />
Feedback<br />
Group work: producing sections <strong>of</strong> tourist<br />
brochure for students' town<br />
A scheme <strong>of</strong> work helps us plan a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons in <strong>the</strong> best way to cover<br />
<strong>the</strong> school syllabus or <strong>the</strong> units <strong>of</strong> a coursebook in <strong>the</strong> time available. It also<br />
helps us to think about what we want to achieve and what materials we might<br />
need. It also helps us to include enough variety across our lessons. Teacher<br />
and learners need dear aims beyond <strong>the</strong> single lesson and need to see how<br />
lessons are linked to each o<strong>the</strong>r. Here are some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> main advantages and<br />
disadvantages.<br />
Scheme Advantages<br />
A Leaves teacher free to<br />
respond to learners'<br />
needs.<br />
B Quite detailed. Some<br />
sense <strong>of</strong> direction.<br />
C Very detailed. Gives very<br />
clear sense <strong>of</strong> direction.<br />
Disadvantages<br />
Gives no details <strong>of</strong> what will happen in <strong>the</strong>se lessons and<br />
so does not remind <strong>the</strong> teacher <strong>of</strong> general aims or what<br />
materials to prepare.<br />
Probably <strong>the</strong> most useful <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> three schemes <strong>of</strong> work.<br />
Not too much detail or too little, but <strong>the</strong> teacher will<br />
probably need to return to it and add more detail week by<br />
week to turn it into a set <strong>of</strong> lesson plans.<br />
Difficult to predict several weeks ahead exactly what<br />
learners' needs may be, so <strong>the</strong> teacher will need to return<br />
frequently to <strong>the</strong> scheme <strong>of</strong> work and change it if<br />
necessary.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 56
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
You can see that schemes <strong>of</strong> work are less detailed than lesson plans. Like any<br />
individual lesson, a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons should have a logical and <strong>learning</strong>friendly<br />
progression and a good balance <strong>of</strong> approaches and activities. Like a<br />
lesson plan, a scheme <strong>of</strong> work helps us to identify our aims and make sure we<br />
choose materials and procedures that match those aims.<br />
<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
• It's a good idea to make lesson plans look as simple as possible, so notes<br />
are better than full sentences, and <strong>the</strong>re's no need to describe every step in<br />
great detail. However, we may want to write down some important things in<br />
a complete form - for example, prompts for drilling, questions to check<br />
learners' understanding, instructions, etc.<br />
• A lesson plan should be clear and easy to read during <strong>the</strong> lesson. Different<br />
colours, boxes, underlining, etc. are useful. It is <strong>of</strong>ten helpful to include<br />
drawings <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> way <strong>the</strong> blackboard (or whiteboard) will look at different<br />
stages.<br />
• Variety is very important both in a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons and in a single<br />
lesson. We should avoid always doing <strong>the</strong> same kinds <strong>of</strong> things in <strong>the</strong> same<br />
order, e.g. always beginning <strong>the</strong> lesson with a conversation or always<br />
ending with a role-play. There are several different ways <strong>of</strong> introducing<br />
variety into lessons. Here is a list <strong>of</strong> things we can vary:<br />
Pace<br />
quick and fast-moving or slow and reflective<br />
interaction pattern individual, pairs, groups, whole class<br />
Skill productive or receptive<br />
level <strong>of</strong> difficulty<br />
non-demanding or requiring effort and concentration<br />
Content changing from one <strong>language</strong> point to ano<strong>the</strong>r; from one<br />
subject to ano<strong>the</strong>r<br />
Mood light or serious; happy or sad; tense or relaxed<br />
exciting or calming activities 'stirring' (lively and active) or 'settling' (quietening down)<br />
• Learners may well require more frequent revision than <strong>the</strong> coursebook<br />
provides. A scheme <strong>of</strong> work is a good way to make sure that we recycle<br />
<strong>language</strong> (i.e. use it again) and include regular revision activities during a<br />
sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons.<br />
• Coursebook units are <strong>of</strong>ten arranged around a specific topic (such as sport<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 57
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
or relationships), which may be a useful way <strong>of</strong> linking toge<strong>the</strong>r a sequence<br />
<strong>of</strong> lessons. This kind <strong>of</strong> sequence gives us <strong>the</strong> chance to develop particular<br />
areas <strong>of</strong> vocabulary, but learners may feel that <strong>the</strong> lessons are repetitive, so<br />
we need plenty <strong>of</strong> variety <strong>of</strong> texts and tasks.<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />
1 The lesson summaries 1-6 below are part <strong>of</strong> a scheme <strong>of</strong> work to introduce<br />
and practise <strong>language</strong> for describing people, clo<strong>the</strong>s and places. Complete<br />
<strong>the</strong> scheme <strong>of</strong> work with <strong>the</strong> correct summaries (A, B or C)<br />
A Project work: groups prepare poster displays (magazine photographs)<br />
Writing: descriptions <strong>of</strong> people and places (fur<strong>the</strong>r practice <strong>of</strong> functional <strong>language</strong>)<br />
B Listening: descriptions <strong>of</strong> people<br />
Present new vocabulary and check pronunciation: lexical sets for describing people<br />
(flashcards and board drawings) Writing: descriptions <strong>of</strong> students in class<br />
C Video (TV police drama): focus on descriptions <strong>of</strong> people<br />
Role-play in pairs: police interviews (practice <strong>of</strong> new <strong>language</strong>) → whole-class<br />
correction<br />
Scheme <strong>of</strong> work<br />
1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………..<br />
2 Reading: descriptions <strong>of</strong> clo<strong>the</strong>s (from teenage magazine)<br />
Vocabulary: dictionary work<br />
Writing: descriptions <strong>of</strong> people and clo<strong>the</strong>s → peer correction (pairwork)<br />
3 Vocabulary: descriptions <strong>of</strong> places and people (photographs)<br />
Practice exercises (coursebook)<br />
Speaking: describe-and-draw activity (pairwork)<br />
Writing: descriptions <strong>of</strong> places drawn in speaking activity<br />
4 Vocabulary: pictures <strong>of</strong> people, clo<strong>the</strong>s and places<br />
Grammar: comparative and superlative adjectives<br />
Practice exercises (coursebook)<br />
Speaking: general knowledge quiz (whole class)<br />
5. ………………………………………………………………………………………………..<br />
6. ………………………………………………………………………………………………..<br />
2 In <strong>the</strong> scheme <strong>of</strong> work in Activity 1,which lesson or lessons:<br />
A. has/have a variety <strong>of</strong> pace?<br />
B. use(s) different interaction patterns?<br />
C. practice (s) receptive skills?<br />
D. practice(s) productive skills?<br />
E. increase(s) <strong>the</strong> level <strong>of</strong> difficulty?<br />
F. has/have a change <strong>of</strong> topic?<br />
G. has/have a change <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> focus?<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 58
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
H. is/are lively and active?<br />
I. is/are calm and quiet?<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />
1. The coursebook gives me everything I need to plan a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons.<br />
2. If I do a scheme <strong>of</strong> work, I don't have to spend so much time <strong>planning</strong><br />
individual lessons.<br />
3. I want to respond to my learners' needs from lesson to lesson. A scheme <strong>of</strong><br />
work stops me from doing that.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-5, look at <strong>the</strong> lessons in <strong>the</strong> project work sequence below and<br />
fill in <strong>the</strong> missing lessons from <strong>the</strong> options listed A-E.<br />
A. Some learners look for information on <strong>the</strong> internet or in <strong>the</strong> library and make<br />
notes; some plan surveys to find out information from o<strong>the</strong>rs using<br />
questionnaires.<br />
B. Groups exchange <strong>the</strong>ir work, check in and make final suggestions for<br />
editing.<br />
C. In each group learners read each o<strong>the</strong>r’s work, and make suggestions for<br />
editing.<br />
D. Groups plan <strong>the</strong>ir work and decide how to share tasks.<br />
E. Learners plan <strong>the</strong>ir writing or carry out survey interviews.<br />
Project work sequence<br />
Aim: for learners to produce a class magazine<br />
• Explain project aims; whole class decides on list <strong>of</strong> topics; form interest<br />
groups.<br />
1. ………………………………………………………………………………………<br />
2. ………………………………………………………………………………………<br />
3. ………………………………………………………………………………………<br />
• Learners write <strong>the</strong>ir first drafts.<br />
4. ………………………………………………………………………………………<br />
5. ………………………………………………………………………………………<br />
• Make copies <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> magazine for o<strong>the</strong>r classes to read.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 59
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Presentation techniques and introductory activities<br />
What are presentation techniques and introductory activities?<br />
Presentation techniques are ways used by <strong>the</strong> teacher to present (introduce to<br />
learners for <strong>the</strong> first time) new <strong>language</strong> such as vocabulary, grammatical<br />
structures and pronunciation. Introductory activities are those used by a teacher<br />
to introduce a lesson or <strong>teaching</strong> topic.<br />
KEY CONCEPTS<br />
Look at <strong>the</strong> presentation stages (<strong>the</strong> areas that are shaded) in <strong>the</strong>se<br />
descriptions <strong>of</strong> two lessons for elementary-level secondary-school students.<br />
How are <strong>the</strong> stages different?<br />
Presentation, Practice and Production<br />
(PPP) lesson<br />
Aim: students learn <strong>the</strong> difference<br />
between countable and un countable<br />
nouns, and when to use o and some with<br />
<strong>the</strong>m.<br />
Procedure:<br />
1 Ask students what food and drink <strong>the</strong>y<br />
like at birthday parties.<br />
1. Stick on <strong>the</strong> board magazine pictures<br />
<strong>of</strong> different party foods. (They should<br />
be a mixture <strong>of</strong> countable and un<br />
countable nouns e.g. ice cream,<br />
sandwiches, cola, fruit, bananas,<br />
chicken legs, cake, a box <strong>of</strong> sweets.)<br />
2. Ask students <strong>the</strong> names <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> food<br />
items, write <strong>the</strong> names on <strong>the</strong> board<br />
under each picture and <strong>the</strong>n do a<br />
quick choral drill on <strong>the</strong> pronunciation<br />
<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se words.<br />
3. Say students: ‘I’m having a birthday<br />
party this weekend. I’d like a box <strong>of</strong><br />
sweets and a cake for my party. And<br />
I’d like some ice cream, some cola<br />
and some fruit. I’d also like some<br />
sandwiches, some bananas and<br />
some chicken legs’.<br />
4. Say ‘I’d like a box <strong>of</strong> sweets’, I’d like a<br />
cake some ice cream’, etc., and ask<br />
students to repeat each sentence<br />
chorally.<br />
Task-based Learning (TBL)<br />
lesson<br />
Aim: students choose food and<br />
drinks for a birthday party.<br />
Procedure:<br />
1. Hold a discussion with <strong>the</strong><br />
students about when <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
birthdays are, what presents <strong>the</strong>y<br />
would like, what good birthday<br />
parties <strong>the</strong>y have been to and<br />
what <strong>the</strong>y like to eat and drink at<br />
birthday parties.<br />
2. Put students into small groups<br />
and give <strong>the</strong>m a worksheet with<br />
<strong>the</strong> pictures, names and prices <strong>of</strong><br />
lots <strong>of</strong> party food and drink on it.<br />
3. Tell <strong>the</strong> students to do this task:<br />
choose <strong>the</strong> food and drink <strong>the</strong>y<br />
would like for a birthday party for<br />
ten friends keeping within a price<br />
limit e g. $10.<br />
4. The students do <strong>the</strong> task while<br />
<strong>the</strong> teacher goes round <strong>the</strong> class<br />
listening and answering any<br />
questions.<br />
5. Each group tells <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r groups<br />
what decisions <strong>the</strong>y have made.<br />
6. The students ask <strong>the</strong> teacher<br />
questions about any <strong>language</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>y needed for <strong>the</strong> task and/or<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 60
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
5. Point out to <strong>the</strong> students that you can<br />
count some nouns but you can’t<br />
count o<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />
These are called countable and un<br />
countable nouns. You use a with<br />
singular countable nouns or plural<br />
countable nouns.<br />
6. Ask <strong>the</strong> students some concept<br />
questions, e.g. ‘Which <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> food<br />
items on <strong>the</strong> board are countable/un<br />
countable/singular/plural?’<br />
7. Students do a written gap-fill<br />
exercise, filling <strong>the</strong> gaps with a or<br />
some.<br />
8. Students work in pairs with a<br />
worksheet <strong>of</strong> pictures <strong>of</strong> food and<br />
drink like for <strong>the</strong>ir party, e.g. ‘I’d like<br />
some/a……’, while <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r student<br />
takes notes. Then <strong>the</strong>y swap roles.<br />
<strong>the</strong> teacher tells <strong>the</strong> students<br />
about any <strong>language</strong> she noticed<br />
<strong>the</strong>y didn’t know while <strong>the</strong>y were<br />
doing <strong>the</strong> task, e.g. <strong>the</strong><br />
pronunciation <strong>of</strong> some food<br />
words, <strong>the</strong> grammar <strong>of</strong><br />
uncountable and countable<br />
nouns.<br />
7. Students do a written exercise<br />
on <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>.<br />
The introductory stage <strong>of</strong> a lesson helps students to settle into <strong>the</strong> lesson and<br />
focus on its content. There are two kinds <strong>of</strong> introductory activities: warmers<br />
and lead-ins. Warmers <strong>of</strong>ten used to raise students' energy levels or to make<br />
<strong>the</strong>m feel comfortable. They are not always connected to <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson,<br />
for example, <strong>the</strong>y could be a quiz, game or pairwork activity. Lead-ins focus<br />
on <strong>the</strong> topic or new <strong>language</strong> <strong>of</strong> tire lesson. They can also focus motivate<br />
students and make a link between <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> students'<br />
own I (personalization). For example, if in one lesson students are going to<br />
read a text about Internet, ra<strong>the</strong>r than giving <strong>the</strong>m <strong>the</strong> text immediately, we<br />
could do one or more lead-in activities such as discussing with students how<br />
<strong>of</strong>ten <strong>the</strong>y use <strong>the</strong> Internet what <strong>the</strong>y use it what <strong>the</strong>ir favorite websites are,<br />
etc. Or if in ano<strong>the</strong>r lesson <strong>the</strong>y are going to listen conversation about favorite<br />
television programmes, <strong>the</strong> lead-in activities might be making a list <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir favorite<br />
television programmes and discussing <strong>the</strong>m with a partner. These activities;<br />
probably lead on to <strong>teaching</strong> relevant vocabulary for <strong>the</strong> texts and<br />
comprehension task follow.<br />
If you look back at <strong>the</strong> PPP and TBL lessons on page 61 you will see that <strong>the</strong>y<br />
too include introductory activities. Step 1 in <strong>the</strong> PPP lesson provides a lead-in to<br />
<strong>the</strong> topic, and steps 2 and 3 a lead-in for <strong>language</strong> needed for <strong>the</strong> lesson's main<br />
aim. In <strong>the</strong> TBL lesson, steps 1 and 2 are lead-ins.<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
The two lessons on pages 61-2 show two common and different approaches to<br />
presenting <strong>language</strong> items. The lesson on <strong>the</strong> left is an example <strong>of</strong> a PPP<br />
lesson, <strong>the</strong> lesson on <strong>the</strong> right a example <strong>of</strong> a TBL lesson. There are many<br />
differences between <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 61
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
In <strong>the</strong> Presentation, Practice and Production (PPP) lesson<br />
− The lesson has a <strong>language</strong> aim.<br />
− The teacher first contextualises <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>, i.e. puts it into a<br />
situation which shows what it means. (Step 1).<br />
− The teacher <strong>the</strong>n makes sure that <strong>the</strong> students remember previously studied<br />
<strong>language</strong> needed to practice <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> by eliciting it, i.e. asking<br />
students to say <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> ra<strong>the</strong>r than giving it to <strong>the</strong>m, and by doing a<br />
choral drill (getting <strong>the</strong> students to repeat as a whole class what he/she<br />
says). (Steps 2-3)<br />
− The teacher next presents <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> and <strong>the</strong> students just listen.<br />
(Step 4)<br />
− The students <strong>the</strong>n say sentences including <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> in a very<br />
controlled or restricted practice activity, i.e. one in which <strong>the</strong>y can use<br />
only <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> and without making mistakes. (Step 5)<br />
− The teacher tells students about <strong>the</strong> grammatical use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>.<br />
(Step 6)<br />
− The teacher asks <strong>the</strong> students concept questions, i.e. questions that check<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir understanding <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> use or meaning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>. (Step 7)<br />
− The students <strong>the</strong>n carry out ano<strong>the</strong>r controlled practice activity. (Step 8)<br />
− The students do less controlled or freer practice (i.e. where <strong>the</strong>y can use<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir own ideas) using <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>. (Step 9)<br />
You can see that in a PPP lesson <strong>the</strong> teacher:<br />
1. presents new <strong>language</strong> in a context<br />
2. gets students to practice it in controlled practice activities<br />
3. asks <strong>the</strong> students to use <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> in less controlled activities, in a<br />
communicative way.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> Task-based Learning (TBL) lesson:<br />
The aim <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson is for <strong>the</strong> students to complete a task (an activity in<br />
which students try to achieve something real, and have to communicate to<br />
do so).<br />
The teacher starts by holding a discussion on <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson. (Step<br />
1)<br />
The teacher <strong>the</strong>n gives <strong>the</strong> students tasks to do. (Steps 2, 3, 4, 5)<br />
Then <strong>the</strong> teacher and students discuss any new or problematic <strong>language</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>y needed for <strong>the</strong> task. (Step 6)<br />
Lastly, <strong>the</strong> students do an exercise on <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>. (Step 7)<br />
You can see that in a TBL lesson <strong>the</strong> teacher:<br />
1. gives students tasks to do<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 62
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
2. presents new <strong>language</strong> after students have needed to use it, and only<br />
presents <strong>language</strong> that he/she or <strong>the</strong> students have identified as needed.<br />
A PPP approach to presenting new <strong>language</strong> gives students an opportunity to<br />
practise <strong>language</strong> in a safe <strong>learning</strong> environment where it is difficult to make<br />
mistakes. It can <strong>the</strong>refore be quite a confidence-building approach for students.<br />
But it makes students learn <strong>language</strong> Items <strong>the</strong>y may not be interested in or<br />
ready to learn and gives <strong>the</strong>m few opportunities to really use <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> for<br />
communication. The TBL approach, on <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r hand, allows students to find<br />
new <strong>language</strong> when <strong>the</strong>y want to, and to use <strong>language</strong> experimentally and<br />
creatively for real communication, In this way it puts second <strong>language</strong> learners<br />
in a situation which is quite similar to <strong>the</strong> one in which children learn <strong>the</strong>ir first<br />
<strong>language</strong>. Some learners may find this approach to <strong>language</strong> <strong>learning</strong> exciting<br />
and challenging. O<strong>the</strong>rs may wish for more guidance and structure to help<br />
<strong>the</strong>m.<br />
PPP and TBL are not <strong>the</strong> only ways <strong>of</strong> presenting new <strong>language</strong>. It is also<br />
possible, for example, to present new <strong>language</strong> to learners after <strong>the</strong>y have met<br />
it in a reading or listening text which is first used for comprehension. Ano<strong>the</strong>r<br />
possibility is to hold a discussion on a topic and introduce new <strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />
context <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> discussion; ano<strong>the</strong>r one is to give learners a task that requires<br />
<strong>the</strong>m to use new <strong>language</strong>, <strong>the</strong>n after <strong>the</strong> task, present <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> to<br />
<strong>the</strong>m and <strong>the</strong>n give <strong>the</strong>m ano<strong>the</strong>r task to practise <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> (Testteach-test).<br />
Presenting new <strong>language</strong> involves making various choices:<br />
When to present <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>? Before (as in PPP) or after (as in TBL)<br />
learners try to use <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>?<br />
What and how many <strong>language</strong> items to present (new grammatical structures,<br />
new vocabulary, new lexical phrases, new functional exponents, new topics)? In<br />
PPP <strong>the</strong> teacher makes this choice; in TBL <strong>the</strong> teacher and/or <strong>the</strong> learners<br />
make <strong>the</strong> choice.<br />
What context to present <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> in? In both TBL and PPP new<br />
<strong>language</strong> Items are presented in a meaningful context, i.e. one that shows <strong>the</strong><br />
meaning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>, and is personalised.<br />
What aids to use to help create <strong>the</strong> context, e.g. pictures, video, cassette, a<br />
worksheet?<br />
How to show <strong>the</strong> meaning or use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>, e.g. explanation,<br />
translation, presenting through a situation?<br />
What aspects <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> to present, i.e. one, some or all <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
following:<br />
meaning/use, pronunciation, grammar, spelling?<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 63
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Introductory activities involve <strong>the</strong> teacher in selecting interesting and relevant<br />
warmers and lead-ins. The warmers make <strong>the</strong> students feel comfortable and<br />
ready for <strong>the</strong> lesson, and <strong>the</strong> lead-ins introduce <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and main<br />
<strong>language</strong> points needed by <strong>the</strong> learners le complete <strong>the</strong> main tasks <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
lesson. You may not always need to do warmers as learners may arrive at a<br />
lesson ready to learn.<br />
The ways you present new <strong>language</strong> or introduce lessons will depend on your<br />
learners - <strong>the</strong>ir level, interests, age, what <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y already know,<br />
weaknesses and strengths in English and <strong>learning</strong> styles. They will also depend<br />
on <strong>the</strong> resources available to you in your school and <strong>the</strong> approach to<br />
presentation used in your course book.<br />
See Unit 16 for types <strong>of</strong> activities and tasks, Unit 18 for selecting <strong>language</strong> for<br />
lesson, Units 23-25 for resources and materials useful for presentation and Unit<br />
26 for classroom functions <strong>of</strong>ten used by <strong>the</strong> teacher to present new <strong>language</strong>.<br />
FOLLOW – UP ACTIVITY<br />
Which <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se are presentation activities?<br />
1. The teacher says two new functional exponents and asks <strong>the</strong> learners to<br />
repeat <strong>the</strong>m.'<br />
2. The learners read a newspaper article and do a comprehension task on<br />
it.<br />
3. The learners ask <strong>the</strong> teacher how to say ... in English and <strong>the</strong> teacher<br />
tells <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
4. The teacher points out to learners that in <strong>the</strong> task many <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m<br />
mispronounced <strong>the</strong> word station. She asks <strong>the</strong>m to repeat it after her.<br />
5. The learners have a discussion.<br />
6. The learners translate a short poem into <strong>the</strong>ir own <strong>language</strong>.<br />
7. The teacher uses a picture story to create a context for introducing he<br />
and she.<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and<br />
why?<br />
1. TBL is close to <strong>the</strong> way we learn new <strong>language</strong> in our first <strong>language</strong>.<br />
2. Learners prefer a PPP to a TBL approach.<br />
3. I always present new <strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong> same way as I was taught at school.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-6, match <strong>the</strong> parts <strong>of</strong> a presentation stage with <strong>the</strong> names<br />
listed A-G. There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />
Parts <strong>of</strong> a presentation stage<br />
Names<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 64
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
1 went, carne, chose, swam, ate, thought,<br />
ran<br />
The teacher tells <strong>the</strong> learners about a<br />
wonderful holiday she went on last summer.<br />
Photos <strong>of</strong> last summer’s holiday.<br />
The teacher asks: ‘When am I talking about,<br />
<strong>the</strong> past, <strong>the</strong> present or <strong>the</strong> future?’<br />
The teacher drills pronunciation <strong>of</strong> new<br />
words.<br />
The teacher says: ‘We use <strong>the</strong> past tense<br />
to talk about actions in <strong>the</strong> past that have<br />
completely finished.’<br />
A. concept question<br />
B. aids in presentation<br />
C. context for presentation<br />
D. freer practice activity<br />
E. <strong>language</strong> selected for<br />
presentation<br />
F. controlled practice activity<br />
G. explanation <strong>of</strong> use<br />
Practice Activities and Task for Language and Skills<br />
Development<br />
What are practice activities and tasks for <strong>language</strong> and skills development?<br />
These are activities and tasks designed to give learners opportunities to<br />
practice and extend <strong>the</strong>ir use <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong>, such as new vocabulary, functional<br />
exponents or grammatical structures, or <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> subskills <strong>of</strong> reading, listening,<br />
speaking or writing. There are many different kinds <strong>of</strong> activities and tasks with<br />
different names and different uses.<br />
Key concepts<br />
Here are two writing activities. Can you find three <strong>teaching</strong> differences between<br />
<strong>the</strong>m?<br />
Activity 1 Activity 2<br />
Complete <strong>the</strong>se sentences about<br />
yourself with can or can 't.<br />
1 I.......... swim.<br />
2 I.......... speak Mandarin.<br />
3 I.......... play <strong>the</strong> guitar.<br />
4 I.......... use a computer<br />
5 I.......... run very fast.<br />
Write an invitation inviting your<br />
friends to your birthday party.<br />
Invite <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
Tell <strong>the</strong>m:<br />
<strong>the</strong> date<br />
<strong>the</strong> time<br />
<strong>the</strong> address <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> party.<br />
We can see that both <strong>the</strong>se activities give learners an opportunity to use<br />
<strong>language</strong>, but in different ways.<br />
Activity 1 − is a less controlled/freer<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 65
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Activity 2<br />
− is a controlled/restricted practice<br />
− activity because learners can only<br />
use<br />
certain items <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />
− focuses on accurate use <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>language</strong><br />
− is a gap-fill exercise.<br />
practice<br />
activity because <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
learners<br />
will use is not carefully limited or<br />
controlled<br />
− focuses on communicating a<br />
message<br />
− is a task.<br />
The same kinds <strong>of</strong> differences can also be seen in o<strong>the</strong>r activities for speaking,<br />
writing and <strong>learning</strong> new <strong>language</strong>. Drills (guided repetitions), copying words<br />
or sentences, jazz chants, dictation and reading aloud are o<strong>the</strong>r examples <strong>of</strong><br />
controlled practice activities. In freer activities <strong>the</strong> teacher or <strong>the</strong> materials do<br />
not limit <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> that learners use. Examples <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se are: discussions;<br />
solving problems through exchanging ideas; sharing or comparing ideas,<br />
information or experiences; writing emails, stories, letters, invitations or<br />
compositions.<br />
Here are six more activities. What skill/subskill/<strong>language</strong> do <strong>the</strong>y focus on?<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> name <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> type <strong>of</strong> activity?<br />
1. Read <strong>the</strong> story. Then answer<br />
<strong>the</strong>se questions:<br />
a) How old is <strong>the</strong> girl?<br />
b) Where does she live?<br />
c) What is her friend's<br />
name?<br />
__________________________<br />
2. A. Listen to <strong>the</strong> tape and<br />
choose <strong>the</strong> best answer:<br />
The children's school is:<br />
a. near <strong>the</strong>ir house<br />
b. near <strong>the</strong> shops<br />
c. opposite <strong>the</strong> post <strong>of</strong>fice<br />
B. Now listen again. Are <strong>the</strong>se<br />
sentences true or false?<br />
a. The school is new.<br />
b. The classroom is big.<br />
c. The library has many<br />
books.<br />
__________________________<br />
3. Look at <strong>the</strong>se pictures and <strong>the</strong>n<br />
read <strong>the</strong> story. Put <strong>the</strong> pictures<br />
in <strong>the</strong> correct order. Write <strong>the</strong><br />
correct number (1-6) under each<br />
picture.<br />
4. Listen to <strong>the</strong> tape, and in pairs fill in<br />
his form:<br />
Girl’s name: ………..................<br />
Girl's address:.................................<br />
Name <strong>of</strong> girl's friend: ....................<br />
___________________________<br />
5. Work in pairs. Each <strong>of</strong> you should<br />
use one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se role cards.<br />
A. Your friend has a problem.<br />
Give him/her <strong>the</strong> best advice<br />
you can.<br />
B. You have a problem. You<br />
want to go to university, but<br />
you find studying very<br />
difficult. Ask your friend for<br />
advice.<br />
_____________________________<br />
6. Set into groups <strong>of</strong> four. Find out<br />
which food your friends like and<br />
dislike most. Ask: W<br />
Which food do you like most?<br />
Which food do you dislike most?<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 66
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Here are <strong>the</strong> answers to <strong>the</strong> questions above<br />
Activity Skill/subskill/<strong>language</strong> Type <strong>of</strong> activity<br />
1 Reading for specific Wh-questions (questions beginning with<br />
Information<br />
question words: e.g.<br />
2 Listening for specific<br />
Information<br />
3 Reading for detail Ordering<br />
4 Listening for specific Form filling<br />
information<br />
5 Fluency in<br />
speaking/freer<br />
practice <strong>of</strong> new<br />
<strong>language</strong><br />
which/what/how/when/why) for comprehension<br />
A. Multiple-choice questions (an activity in<br />
which you choose <strong>the</strong> best answer from<br />
three or more possible answers)<br />
B. True/False questions (an activity in which<br />
you decide whe<strong>the</strong>r statements are correct<br />
or incorrect)<br />
Role-play (an activity in which you imagine that<br />
you are someone else in a specific situation)<br />
6 Accuracy in<br />
speaking/ controlled<br />
practice <strong>of</strong> new<br />
<strong>language</strong><br />
Survey (finding out <strong>the</strong> opinions <strong>of</strong> a group on<br />
one topic)<br />
We can see that activities can differ in several ways: <strong>the</strong> skill or subskill <strong>the</strong>y<br />
focus on; what type <strong>the</strong>y are and what interaction patterns <strong>the</strong>y use. The kinds<br />
<strong>of</strong> skills or <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong> focus on and <strong>the</strong> interaction patterns <strong>the</strong>y use are<br />
not fixed. So for example, multiple -choice questions could be used for reading,<br />
listening or grammar activities and can be done individually, in pairs or in<br />
groups. Similarly, form-filling could be used for reading, listening or grammar<br />
practice, and done individually, in pairs or in groups.<br />
Activities 5 and 6 both involve learners talking to one ano<strong>the</strong>r to exchange<br />
information <strong>the</strong>y don't know. This means <strong>the</strong>y are talking in order to<br />
communicate, not just to practice <strong>language</strong>. This kind <strong>of</strong> activity in which<br />
learners information on exchange information that only one, <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m has is<br />
called an information gap or a communicative activity.<br />
An activity may focus on accuracy or communication depending on how it is<br />
introduced t <strong>the</strong> teacher or <strong>the</strong> materials. For example, <strong>the</strong> survey above is<br />
focused on accuracy because limits <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> that learners use to ask and<br />
answer two specific questions. If <strong>the</strong> instructions for <strong>the</strong> activity were ‘Find out<br />
about your friends’ likes and dislikes in food’, this would not restrict learners'<br />
choice <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> and <strong>the</strong> activity would focus on communication<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 67
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
When selecting activities for practising <strong>language</strong> or <strong>the</strong> skills <strong>of</strong> speaking or<br />
writing, we need to decide whe<strong>the</strong>r to do a controlled practice or a freer practice<br />
activity, an activity that focuses on accuracy or on communication.<br />
When choosing activities for developing skills, we need to decide which skill or<br />
subskill to focus on.<br />
Lessons usually consist <strong>of</strong> a series <strong>of</strong> linked activities. There are several<br />
different ways <strong>of</strong> linking activities in lessons. These are just some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m:<br />
1. PPP: Presentation controlled practice activities freer practice<br />
activities<br />
2. TBL: Discussion tasks presentation focus on form<br />
3. Skills-based lessons: Warmer and lead-in comprehension tasks<br />
post-task activities<br />
Example 1: A listening skills lesson<br />
Lead-in: discussing <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> listening and <strong>learning</strong> any important<br />
new vocabulary Comprehension tasks: listening to <strong>the</strong> recorded<br />
conversation and answering multiple-choice gist questions about it<br />
listening to <strong>the</strong> conversation again and completing a form with specific<br />
information Post-task activities: brief discussion <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
conversation.<br />
You can see that <strong>the</strong> comprehension activities (for listening or reading)<br />
start with focusing on more general levels <strong>of</strong> comprehension before<br />
moving on to subskills that require paying more detailed or specific<br />
attention to <strong>the</strong> text.<br />
Example 2: A topic-based lesson which develops several skills<br />
Lead-in: speaking about <strong>the</strong> topic and doing related <strong>language</strong> work<br />
Tasks: listening to recording about <strong>the</strong> topic reading a text about <strong>the</strong><br />
topic Post-task activities: discussing <strong>the</strong> topic and/or focus on <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>language</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> topic writing a composition about <strong>the</strong> topic.<br />
FOLLOW- UP ACTIVITIES<br />
1. What do <strong>the</strong>se activities aim to develop? Put <strong>the</strong>m into <strong>the</strong> correct column.<br />
Communication<br />
Accuracy<br />
A. choral drilling <strong>of</strong> pronunciation<br />
B. role-play<br />
C. dictation<br />
D. discussions<br />
E. gap-fill exercises<br />
F. story writing<br />
G. copying words<br />
H. repeating new words<br />
I. describing pictures<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 68
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
J. <strong>learning</strong> conversations by heart<br />
K. problem solving<br />
2. Which skill (s) could <strong>the</strong>se activities be used to develop?<br />
A. story completion<br />
B. form-filling<br />
C. information gap<br />
D. true/false questions<br />
E. role-play<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se learners' comments:<br />
1. I don't like doing lots <strong>of</strong> different activities - it's confusing.<br />
2. I like doing a mixture <strong>of</strong> activities with some focusing on accuracy and<br />
some on fluency. That really helps me learn.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-7, match <strong>the</strong> descriptions with <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> activities listed A-H.<br />
There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />
Descriptions<br />
Teaching activities<br />
A. problem solving<br />
B. a role-play<br />
C. labeling<br />
D. choral drilling<br />
E. form filling<br />
F. a game<br />
G. a survey<br />
H. project work<br />
1. The teacher says a word and asks all <strong>the</strong> learners to repeat it toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
2. The teacher puts learners in pairs and asks one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m to act as a lost<br />
tourist asking <strong>the</strong> way, and <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r as a local person giving directions.<br />
3. The learners use maps to work out <strong>the</strong> best way to get from X to Y<br />
4. The learners listen to a tape and complete a timetable.<br />
5. The learners ask all <strong>the</strong>ir classmates <strong>the</strong>ir opinion about something and<br />
<strong>the</strong>n note it down.<br />
6. The learners go to <strong>the</strong> local museum, <strong>the</strong> library and <strong>the</strong> Internet to find<br />
out about dinosaurs. They <strong>the</strong>n make an exhibition <strong>of</strong> wall posters about<br />
<strong>the</strong>m.<br />
7. The learners choose names <strong>of</strong> objects from a list and write <strong>the</strong> names<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 69
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
under pictures <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> objects.<br />
Choosing assessment activities<br />
<br />
How do we choose assessment activities?<br />
Assessment means collecting information about learners' performance in order<br />
to make judgements about <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>learning</strong>. We may choose to assess, formally<br />
(through tests and examinations) or informally. We can carry out informal<br />
assessment during a lesson by monitoring (i.e. listening carefully) and<br />
observing learners while <strong>the</strong>y are doing ordinary classroom activities. Informal<br />
assessment is an important way <strong>of</strong> checking how our learners are getting on,<br />
but <strong>of</strong> course we can't assess all our learners all <strong>the</strong> time during lessons. To get<br />
more information about <strong>the</strong> progress <strong>of</strong> individual learners, we also need to<br />
carry out formal assessment (e.g. a class test).<br />
When <strong>planning</strong> assessment, we need to think first about our reasons for<br />
assessing learners. Then we can decide when and how <strong>of</strong>ten to assess <strong>the</strong>m,<br />
and choose what methods <strong>of</strong> assessment we are going to use.<br />
<br />
Key concepts<br />
What are <strong>the</strong> differences between formal and informal assessment?<br />
We ran summarise <strong>the</strong> differences between formal and informal assessment<br />
under <strong>the</strong> headings <strong>of</strong> assessment tasks, marking and purpose:<br />
Assessment<br />
tasks<br />
Marking<br />
Purpose<br />
Forma/ assessment<br />
• tests<br />
• examinations<br />
•learners receive grades (%. A-F,<br />
Pass/Fail, etc.)<br />
•to assess overall <strong>language</strong> ability<br />
(pr<strong>of</strong>iciency test)<br />
•to assess <strong>learning</strong> at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> a<br />
course (achievement test)<br />
•to assess <strong>learning</strong> at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> part<br />
<strong>of</strong> a course (progress test)<br />
•to decide if learners can continue to<br />
<strong>the</strong> next level<br />
Informal assessment<br />
•normal classroom <strong>teaching</strong> and<br />
<strong>learning</strong> activities<br />
•homework tasks<br />
•teacher keeps records <strong>of</strong> progress<br />
but does not give grades<br />
•feedback for <strong>the</strong> teacher (i.e. to find<br />
out how successful our <strong>teaching</strong> has<br />
been)<br />
•to help us improve our procedures<br />
or choose different materials or<br />
activities for future lessons<br />
•feedback for learners about what<br />
<strong>the</strong>y can do and what <strong>the</strong>y still need<br />
to work on<br />
<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
Formal assessment<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 70
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
• Formal assessment can consist <strong>of</strong> tasks with single answers (e.g. multiplechoice<br />
questions, matching task, true/false questions) that are easy to<br />
mark. Objective test tasks like <strong>the</strong>se will give us information about learners'<br />
knowledge <strong>of</strong> particular <strong>language</strong> items and specific areas <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> skills.<br />
Some formal assessment makes use <strong>of</strong> more real-life tasks, such as oral<br />
interviews, letters and essays, to get information about learners' general<br />
ability to use spoken and written <strong>language</strong>.<br />
• •When we prepare a class test, it is important to include a number <strong>of</strong><br />
different tasks, so that we get a good picture <strong>of</strong> our learners' strengths and<br />
weaknesses, and to test <strong>the</strong> main things we have taught.<br />
• We need to choose assessment tasks very carefully for young learners,<br />
making sure that <strong>the</strong> tasks are familiar and not too difficult or too abstract.<br />
Informal assessment<br />
• The amount <strong>of</strong> informal assessment we do depends on a number <strong>of</strong> things:<br />
− <strong>the</strong> size <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class<br />
− <strong>the</strong> age <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners (informal assessment is especially useful for<br />
young learners for whom formal test tasks are <strong>of</strong>ten too abstract)<br />
− <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> knowledge or skills we want to assess<br />
− <strong>the</strong> frequency <strong>of</strong> formal tests or examinations.<br />
• It is important for learners to know that we are assessing <strong>the</strong>m, and to know<br />
how and when we are doing it.<br />
• To carry out informal assessment <strong>of</strong> productive skills in larger classes, we<br />
probably need to assess small numbers <strong>of</strong> learners in different lessons. We<br />
can record our opinions on a record sheet or fill in a check list.<br />
• We can carry out informal assessment <strong>of</strong> receptive skills by checking<br />
learners' answers to reading or listening tasks, and taking notes on <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
performance.<br />
• We can make separate assessments <strong>of</strong> learners' grammatical and lexical<br />
knowledge by using <strong>language</strong> games or quizzes, or by monitoring practice<br />
activities and making a note <strong>of</strong> frequent errors. We can <strong>the</strong>n give feedback<br />
to individuals or to <strong>the</strong> whole class, or return to <strong>the</strong> problems later in a<br />
revision lesson.<br />
• We may also wish to assess o<strong>the</strong>r things such as motivation and effort. We<br />
can do this by observation and also by talking to learners about <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
<strong>learning</strong>.<br />
• It is important to keep records <strong>of</strong> informal assessment, especially in larger<br />
classes, so that we have <strong>the</strong> information we need to report or give feedback<br />
on our learners' progress. These records can be quite simple, with headings<br />
for, e.g. grammar, vocabulary, <strong>language</strong> skills, motivation and general<br />
progress against each learner's name.<br />
• We need to plan informal assessment in <strong>the</strong> same way as we plan our<br />
<strong>teaching</strong>.<br />
Formal and informal assessment<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 71
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
• We may use some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> same methods for both formal and informal<br />
assessment (e.g. assessing learners' spoken <strong>language</strong> in an interview). In<br />
<strong>the</strong> case <strong>of</strong> productive skills, whe<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> assessment is formal or informal,<br />
we need to judge learners' performance against clear descriptions <strong>of</strong><br />
different levels <strong>of</strong> skill. These may be general descriptions <strong>of</strong> speaking or<br />
writing, or <strong>the</strong>y may give separate descriptions <strong>of</strong> different subskills. Here<br />
are two examples for speaking. They are designed to assess a wide range<br />
<strong>of</strong> ability.<br />
Example 1<br />
5 Speaks very well-very few errors.<br />
4 Speaks quite well - some errors, but message is always dear.<br />
3 Has some difficulties in speaking - frequent errors and not always dear.<br />
2 Has serious problems in speaking - only very limited ability to communicate.<br />
1 Almost unable to communicate.<br />
Example 2<br />
Accuracy Fluency Pronunciation<br />
5 Grammatical and lexical<br />
accuracy extremely high.<br />
4 Quite accurate; some errors,<br />
but meaning is always clear.<br />
3 Frequent errors; meaning is<br />
not always clear.<br />
2 Very frequent errors;<br />
difficulty in making meaning<br />
clear.<br />
Speaks fluently without<br />
hesitation or searching for<br />
words.<br />
Some hesitation and<br />
sometimes has to search<br />
for words.<br />
Quite hesitant; limited range<br />
<strong>of</strong> vocabulary and<br />
structures.<br />
Extremely hesitant; very<br />
limited range <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />
available.<br />
1 Almost unable to communicate.<br />
Very clear; stress and<br />
intonation help to make<br />
meaning clear.<br />
Generally clear;<br />
reasonable control <strong>of</strong><br />
stress and intonation.<br />
Frequent errors; not<br />
always clear enough to<br />
understand.<br />
Very frequent errors; <strong>of</strong>ten<br />
very difficult to understand.<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITY<br />
Read <strong>the</strong> following statements and decide whe<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong>y are true (T) or false (F).<br />
1. We can use homework tasks for informal assessment.<br />
2. Objective tests have many different possible answers, and this makes <strong>the</strong>m<br />
difficult to mark.<br />
3. In <strong>the</strong> best formal tests learners should only have to do a few different tasks.<br />
4. It's important for learners to know when we are assessing <strong>the</strong>m informally.<br />
5. We can sometimes use games and quizzes for informal assessment.<br />
6. The methods we use for formal assessment are always different from those<br />
we use for informal assessment.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 72
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />
1. I don't have time for informal assessment. I'm far too busy <strong>teaching</strong>.<br />
2. Most <strong>of</strong> my assessment is informal. It's much better than formal testing as a<br />
way <strong>of</strong> finding out what my learners can do.<br />
3. My learners have regular tests, so I don't need to do much informal<br />
assessment.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-7, match <strong>the</strong> instructions for <strong>the</strong> assessment tasks with <strong>the</strong><br />
assessment aims listed A-H.<br />
There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />
Assessment aims<br />
A. To assess oral fluency<br />
B. To assess accurate pronunciation<br />
C. To check knowledge <strong>of</strong> vocabulary<br />
D. To check grammatical knowledge<br />
E. To assess writing skills<br />
F. To check awareness <strong>of</strong> stress<br />
G. To check knowledge <strong>of</strong> functional<br />
exponents<br />
H. To assess gist reading skills.<br />
Instructions for assessment tasks<br />
1. Use <strong>the</strong> notes to make complete sentences. Put <strong>the</strong> verbs into <strong>the</strong><br />
correct form.<br />
2. Choose <strong>the</strong> correct heading for each paragraph<br />
3. Reply to <strong>the</strong> advertisement; explain why you are <strong>the</strong> best person for <strong>the</strong><br />
job.<br />
4. Find <strong>the</strong> words in <strong>the</strong> text which mach <strong>the</strong> following definition.<br />
5. Discuss <strong>the</strong> problem with your partner and try to find <strong>the</strong> solution.<br />
6. Choose <strong>the</strong> most appropriate response for each <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following<br />
situations.<br />
7. Listen and underline <strong>the</strong> word that <strong>the</strong> speaker says most strongly.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 73
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Second stage<br />
Contents<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong> resources and materials<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> course book materials<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials and activities<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> aids<br />
Managing <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong><br />
Identifying <strong>the</strong> functions <strong>of</strong> learner’s <strong>language</strong><br />
Categorizing learners' mistakes<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 74
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
SELECTION AND USE OF RESOURCES AND<br />
MATERIALS<br />
Unit 5 Consulting reference resources to help in lesson preparation<br />
<br />
How do we consult reference resources?<br />
Reference resources are all <strong>the</strong> sources <strong>of</strong> information about <strong>language</strong> and<br />
about <strong>teaching</strong> that we can refer to for help in lesson preparation. They include<br />
reference materials, such as dictionaries and grammar books, books and<br />
articles about methodology in teachers' magazines, <strong>the</strong> teacher's book<br />
accompanying a coursebook that contains answers and <strong>teaching</strong> ideas, and<br />
websites on <strong>the</strong> Internet. Reference resources may also include people, for<br />
example, <strong>the</strong> Head <strong>of</strong> Department or colleagues who teach foreign <strong>language</strong>s<br />
or o<strong>the</strong>r subjects. We consult reference resources by knowing where we can<br />
find <strong>the</strong> information we need and how to find it.<br />
Key concepts<br />
List as many reasons as you can think <strong>of</strong> for making use <strong>of</strong> reference<br />
resources.<br />
When we are <strong>planning</strong> a lesson, <strong>the</strong>re are many reasons for using reference<br />
resources. Some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> main ones are as follows:<br />
Checking <strong>the</strong> form and use <strong>of</strong> grammatical structures<br />
Some grammar books are written for teachers, with very detailed explanations.<br />
O<strong>the</strong>rs, designed for learners at different levels, use simpler <strong>language</strong> to give<br />
essential information about grammatical structures. Grammar books for<br />
learners can help us to see what information our learners need about<br />
grammatical structures and can provide us with suitable ways <strong>of</strong> describing or<br />
explaining grammar. The easiest books to use are those organised in<br />
alphabetical order, or which have a detailed index or table <strong>of</strong> contents. Some<br />
grammar books also include practice exercises, which teachers (and learners)<br />
<strong>of</strong>ten find useful.<br />
Checking <strong>the</strong> spelling, pronunciation and use <strong>of</strong> lexical items<br />
The most useful dictionaries for teachers to use <strong>the</strong>mselves are advanced<br />
learners' dictionaries, which include example sentences, as well as information<br />
about <strong>the</strong> form and use <strong>of</strong> words. Most <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se are also available on CD-ROM<br />
and online on publishers' websites. Bilingual dictionaries (which explain <strong>the</strong><br />
meanings <strong>of</strong> words in <strong>the</strong> learner's own <strong>language</strong>), including electronic<br />
dictionaries, are useful when learners are looking for a word that <strong>the</strong>y don't<br />
know in English. But <strong>the</strong>se dictionaries usually give very little information about<br />
how to use a word, so it's a good idea for learners to check <strong>the</strong> words <strong>the</strong>y find<br />
in a monolingual dictionary (i.e. one that explains <strong>the</strong> meanings <strong>of</strong> words in<br />
<strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> learners are <strong>learning</strong>). Learner dictionaries, like learner grammar<br />
books, can help teachers to find <strong>the</strong> most suitable ways <strong>of</strong> defining words and<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 75
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
giving examples <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir use.<br />
Developing your own understanding <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />
There are a number <strong>of</strong> books for teachers which aim to increase our <strong>language</strong><br />
awareness (our understanding <strong>of</strong> how <strong>language</strong> works) and our awareness <strong>of</strong><br />
how to teach <strong>language</strong>. They <strong>of</strong>ten include tasks that we can do by ourselves<br />
or with a colleague and detailed explanations and comments as well as<br />
answers.<br />
Anticipating learners’ difficulties<br />
Reference materials about learners' errors can help us anticipate particular<br />
<strong>language</strong> problems that our learners might have. Many difficulties with<br />
vocabulary or grammar are <strong>the</strong> result <strong>of</strong> interference from LI. Books or articles<br />
about specific differences between <strong>the</strong> learner's LI and English can help to<br />
explain <strong>the</strong>se problems.<br />
Looking for new approaches to <strong>teaching</strong> lessons and new classroom<br />
activities<br />
If we are looking for new approaches or activities, or if we want to give our<br />
learners something different from <strong>the</strong>ir coursebook, <strong>the</strong>re is a wide range <strong>of</strong><br />
supplementary materials (i.e. materials you can use in addition to or instead<br />
<strong>of</strong> your coursebook), focusing on grammar, vocabulary and particular skills.<br />
There are also very many teacher's resource books with ideas and materials for<br />
all kinds <strong>of</strong> lessons. Some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se provide a wide range <strong>of</strong> activities for extra<br />
grammar or communicative practice, for example, while o<strong>the</strong>rs focus on a<br />
particular type <strong>of</strong> classroom activity, such as dictation or storytelling. Most <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>se books have very dear indexes, giving information about timing,<br />
preparation, level, etc. There is also a growing number <strong>of</strong> free websites with<br />
articles for teachers on different <strong>teaching</strong> topics.<br />
Finding out how to use <strong>the</strong> material in your coursebook<br />
Teacher's books provide suggestions about how to use <strong>the</strong> material in <strong>the</strong><br />
coursebook. Even if <strong>the</strong> lesson <strong>planning</strong> ideas in <strong>the</strong> teacher's book do not suit<br />
a particular <strong>teaching</strong> situation, it is still useful to look at <strong>the</strong>se suggestions, as it<br />
may be possible to adapt <strong>the</strong>m. Some teacher's books include different possible<br />
ways <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong> a lesson, as well as explanations <strong>of</strong> answers to exercises and<br />
extra resources (i.e. things teachers can use to support <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>teaching</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />
classroom), such as homework tasks and activities for fur<strong>the</strong>r practice.<br />
Getting advice about particular lessons or <strong>teaching</strong> materials<br />
Colleagues who have taught at <strong>the</strong> same level or used <strong>the</strong> same <strong>teaching</strong><br />
materials may be able to <strong>of</strong>fer useful advice. As with <strong>the</strong> suggestions in<br />
teacher's books, a colleague's approach may not suit us, but may help us to<br />
think about our own <strong>planning</strong>.<br />
<br />
<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
Some grammar books and dictionaries may contain dearer explanations or<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 76
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
examples. So when checking a <strong>language</strong> item, we should try to look at more<br />
than one reference resource.<br />
Language changes, as new words appear and people stop using some older<br />
words. Grammatical usage, too, changes slowly over time. One way to keep<br />
up to date is to use <strong>the</strong> most recently published grammar books and<br />
dictionaries.<br />
Dictionaries on CD-ROM have many extra features, such as practice<br />
activities,<br />
We can learn a great deal from o<strong>the</strong>r teachers' experiences. Many teachers'<br />
magazines include regular articles by teachers describing successful<br />
lessons <strong>the</strong>y have taught. It may be easier to visit websites than to find <strong>the</strong><br />
books and articles we need. There are many sites on <strong>the</strong> Internet where we<br />
can find free resources such as lesson plans, worksheets (pages with tasks<br />
and exercises on <strong>the</strong>m that a teacher gives to learners during a lesson) and<br />
ideas for <strong>teaching</strong>. Some sites also <strong>of</strong>fer simple programs for making<br />
classroom resources, such as crosswords and gap-fill exercises. The best<br />
way to find <strong>the</strong>se materials is to visit one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> sites that has lists <strong>of</strong> links to<br />
useful <strong>teaching</strong> resources on <strong>the</strong> Internet.<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITY<br />
Try to find resources 1-10 below. Then decide which type <strong>of</strong> resource (A-D)<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are.<br />
1. A-Z <strong>of</strong> English Grammar and Usage by Ge<strong>of</strong>frey Leech, Pearson<br />
Education Ltd 2001<br />
2. Cambridge Learner's Dictionary, Cambridge University Press 2001<br />
3. Discussions That Work by Penny Ur, Cambridge University Press 1981<br />
4. Planning from Lesson to Lesson by Tessa Woodward and Seth<br />
Lindstromberg, Pearson Education Ltd 1995<br />
5. http://wwwruthvilmi.net/hut/LangHelp/Grarnmar<br />
6. Working with Words by Ruth Gairns and Stuart Redman, Cambridge<br />
University Press 1986<br />
7. http://www.preschookainbow.org<br />
8. Motivating High-Level Learners by David Cranmer, Pearson Education<br />
Ltd 1996<br />
9. Five-Minute Activities by Penny Ur and Andrew Wright, Cambridge<br />
University Press 1992.<br />
10. http://www.puzzlemaker.com<br />
A. Language reference resources<br />
B. ideas for <strong>planning</strong> lessons<br />
C. resources for teachers and learners producing <strong>the</strong>ir own materials<br />
D. materials for very young learners<br />
REFLECTION<br />
1 What were <strong>the</strong> reference resources you used when you were studying<br />
English? Do <strong>the</strong>y still help you?<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 77
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
2 What are <strong>the</strong> reference resources you use most <strong>of</strong>ten when preparing<br />
lessons? In what ways do <strong>the</strong>y help you?<br />
3 If you had to go and teach in a place with very few resources, which three<br />
reference books would you take with you?<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-7, match <strong>the</strong> teachers’ descriptions with <strong>the</strong> reference<br />
resources listed A-H. There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />
Reference resources<br />
A. A <strong>language</strong> awareness book for teachers<br />
B. A book to help teachers use one kind <strong>of</strong> resource<br />
C. A teachers’ magazine on <strong>the</strong> internet<br />
D. A picture dictionary<br />
E. A learner’s grammar book<br />
F. A monolingual dictionary<br />
G. A book about interference from different first<br />
<strong>language</strong>s<br />
H. A bilingual dictionary<br />
Teacher’s descriptions<br />
1. Sometimes I just need to check what a word means in my own <strong>language</strong><br />
2. If you teach beginners all <strong>the</strong> time, it’s good to have a book that helps up<br />
your own <strong>language</strong> level.<br />
3. I want my learners to read English definitions <strong>of</strong> English words.<br />
4. It gives me information about rules and usage, written in <strong>language</strong> I can use<br />
in <strong>the</strong> classroom, and <strong>the</strong>re are exercises for learners, too.<br />
5. My school has just got some new computers, and this book gives me <strong>the</strong><br />
ideas I need about how to use <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
6. My young learners find it easier to remember new words if <strong>the</strong>y can see<br />
what things look like.<br />
7. It has articles by teachers, lesson plans and worksheets you can print out<br />
and lots <strong>of</strong> useful links.<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong> coursebook materials<br />
<br />
How do we select and use coursebook materials?<br />
Coursebook materials are all <strong>the</strong> materials in a coursebook package that we<br />
use in <strong>the</strong> classroom to present and practise <strong>language</strong>, and to develop<br />
learners' <strong>language</strong> skills.<br />
A coursebook package usually includes a student's book, a teacher's book and<br />
audio and/or video recordings. The teacher's book <strong>of</strong>ten includes <strong>the</strong> tapescript<br />
(i.e. <strong>the</strong> words learners hear) <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se recordings. Often <strong>the</strong>re is also a<br />
workbook or activity book (a book with extra practice material), and <strong>the</strong>re may<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 78
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
also be a CD-ROM or extra material on a website.<br />
Teachers <strong>of</strong>ten base <strong>the</strong>ir selection <strong>of</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> materials (coursebook or<br />
supplementary) on a 'needs analysis', i.e. a study <strong>of</strong> learners' level, <strong>language</strong><br />
needs and interests, using questionnaires, interviews or diagnostic tests. This<br />
information helps to build up a class pr<strong>of</strong>ile (a description <strong>of</strong> all <strong>the</strong> learners in<br />
<strong>the</strong> class) and shows what <strong>the</strong>y have in common and how <strong>the</strong>y differ from each<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r. The teacher's task is <strong>the</strong>n to select <strong>the</strong> material that best matches this<br />
pr<strong>of</strong>ile.<br />
Key concepts<br />
What questions should we ask when selecting <strong>teaching</strong> materials?<br />
We may not be able to choose our coursebook, but we can still make choices<br />
about what materials in it to use. Decisions about whe<strong>the</strong>r - and how - to use<br />
<strong>the</strong> coursebook or part <strong>of</strong> it will depend on <strong>the</strong> answers to a number <strong>of</strong><br />
questions:<br />
• Is <strong>the</strong> material visually attractive? Is it visually dear (e.g. using different<br />
colours, different fonts, headings, etc.)? Does <strong>the</strong> visual material help<br />
learners to understand context and meaning?<br />
• Is it well organised? Can you and your learners follow <strong>the</strong> 'logic' <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
material and find your way around <strong>the</strong> page or <strong>the</strong> unit quickly and easily?<br />
• Is it culturally appropriate? Will <strong>the</strong> context(s) be familiar to learners?<br />
• Is it suitable for your learners' age and <strong>the</strong>ir needs and interests?<br />
• Will <strong>the</strong> topics be motivating to suit <strong>the</strong> age, gender, experience and<br />
personal interests <strong>of</strong> your learners?<br />
• •Is it at <strong>the</strong> right level? Does it provide a clear enough context and/or<br />
explanations for learners to understand new <strong>language</strong>?<br />
• Does it give learners enough opportunities to use <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong>?<br />
If <strong>the</strong> answer to any <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se questions is 'No', <strong>the</strong>n we have two choices:<br />
• to replace <strong>the</strong> coursebook material with materials with <strong>the</strong> same focus/aim<br />
from ano<strong>the</strong>r book or resource, such as a teachers' website or<br />
supplementary materials<br />
• to adapt <strong>the</strong> coursebook material, i.e. change it in some way to make it<br />
suitable for our learners.<br />
There are a number <strong>of</strong> ways to adapt material that is not suitable for a particular<br />
<strong>teaching</strong> situation. Here are some ideas:<br />
Strategies Problems Possible solutions<br />
Extending<br />
material<br />
Shortening<br />
material<br />
•The task or exercise is too short.<br />
•The learners need more practice.<br />
•The task or exercise is too long.<br />
•The learners don't need so much<br />
practice.<br />
.<br />
•Write extra items, following <strong>the</strong> same<br />
pattern.<br />
•Use as much as you need, but do<br />
not feel you have to use it all. •Give<br />
different parts <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> text or task to<br />
different learners.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 79
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Changing <strong>the</strong><br />
form <strong>of</strong> tasks<br />
Changing <strong>the</strong><br />
level <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
material<br />
Reordering<br />
material<br />
Making use <strong>of</strong><br />
all <strong>the</strong><br />
resources in <strong>the</strong><br />
book<br />
• The task doesn't suit <strong>the</strong> learners'<br />
<strong>learning</strong> style.<br />
• You want a change <strong>of</strong> pace.<br />
• The coursebook <strong>of</strong>ten repeats <strong>the</strong><br />
same kind <strong>of</strong> task<br />
•The texts or tasks are too easy or<br />
too difficult.<br />
•The activities in <strong>the</strong> units in <strong>the</strong><br />
book always follow <strong>the</strong> same<br />
sequence.<br />
•The learners need to learn or<br />
practise things in a different order.<br />
•There is not enough practice<br />
material in a particular unit.<br />
•The learners need to revise<br />
particular items.<br />
•You want to preview material in a<br />
future unit.<br />
•Change <strong>the</strong> interaction pattern, e.g.<br />
use a matching task as a mingling<br />
activity (i.e. one in which learners<br />
move around <strong>the</strong> class, in this case to<br />
find <strong>the</strong>ir partners).<br />
•Make material more challenging, e.g.<br />
learners try to answer comprehension<br />
questions before reading.<br />
•Make material less challenging, e.g.<br />
break up a long text into shorter<br />
sections.<br />
•Change <strong>the</strong> order <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> material,<br />
e.g. ask learners to cover up a page<br />
or part <strong>of</strong> a page, so that <strong>the</strong>y focus<br />
on what you want <strong>the</strong>m to do first.<br />
•Use extra material from <strong>the</strong> book:<br />
grammar summaries, word lists, lists<br />
<strong>of</strong> irregular verbs, etc.<br />
•Give whole-book tasks, e.g.<br />
searching through <strong>the</strong> book for texts,<br />
pictures, <strong>language</strong> examples.<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
• There may be good reasons for leaving out part <strong>of</strong> a unit, or even a whole<br />
unit, but remember that <strong>the</strong> coursebook is one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> main sources <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>learning</strong> (and revision) for our learners. So <strong>the</strong>y may find it confusing if we<br />
do this too <strong>of</strong>ten.<br />
• The coursebook will normally provide <strong>the</strong> main content for a lesson, while<br />
material that needs to be more personalised for <strong>the</strong> learners will probably<br />
come from <strong>the</strong> teacher (or from <strong>the</strong> learners <strong>the</strong>mselves). When <strong>planning</strong><br />
lessons, think about what <strong>the</strong> coursebook gives you, and what you need to<br />
add. For example:<br />
Coursebook provides:<br />
Teacher can provide<br />
additional:<br />
• situation/context • warmer<br />
• pictures • instructions<br />
• dialogues (conversations between two people) and • role-play<br />
texts<br />
• tasks and exercises • homework tasks<br />
• If we plan to reorder <strong>the</strong> material in <strong>the</strong> coursebook, we must make sure that<br />
this is possible, i.e. that a task/exercise does not depend on a previous one.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 80
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
• We can change <strong>the</strong> order <strong>of</strong> activities in <strong>the</strong> coursebook in order to introduce<br />
variety in one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following areas: pace, interaction pattern, sequence <strong>of</strong><br />
skills practice, level <strong>of</strong> difficulty, content, mood, etc.<br />
• We should think about how to make material more attractive and interesting<br />
for learners and how to bring material '<strong>of</strong>f <strong>the</strong> page', e.g. using mime,<br />
pictures, realia (real objects such as clo<strong>the</strong>s or food), etc.<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />
1 Select a unit from your coursebook that you haven't used yet and answer <strong>the</strong><br />
questions.<br />
2 In what way (s) will you need to adapt <strong>the</strong> material? Make notes.<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />
1. I plan my lessons to respond to my learners' needs, so I never use a<br />
coursebook.<br />
2. I always plan my lessons following <strong>the</strong> suggestions in <strong>the</strong> teacher's book. –<br />
3. If use all <strong>the</strong> material in every unit in <strong>the</strong> order given in <strong>the</strong> book.<br />
4. I use a coursebook, but I change most <strong>of</strong> it so that learners don't get bored.<br />
5. I've got a good coursebook and I haven't got time to adapt any <strong>of</strong> it.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-7, match <strong>the</strong> course book instruction with <strong>the</strong> activity aims listed<br />
A-H.<br />
There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />
Coursebook instructions.<br />
Activity aims<br />
A. Accurate use <strong>of</strong> a specific structure<br />
B. Finding collocations<br />
C. Reading for gist<br />
D. Oral fluency practice<br />
E. Finding connections in a text<br />
F. Listening for detailed information<br />
G. Writing a short story<br />
H. Listening for gist.<br />
1. Look quickly through <strong>the</strong> text and choose <strong>the</strong> picture that matches <strong>the</strong><br />
situation.<br />
2. Complete <strong>the</strong> sentences below using one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following modal verbs.<br />
3. Play <strong>the</strong> cassette again and answer <strong>the</strong> true/false questions.<br />
4. Underline all <strong>the</strong> pronouns and draw arrows to show <strong>the</strong> nouns <strong>the</strong>y refer<br />
to.<br />
5. Choose <strong>the</strong> words that go toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
6. In groups <strong>of</strong> three, discuss <strong>the</strong> problem and decide on <strong>the</strong> best solution.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 81
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
7. Look at <strong>the</strong> photographs and decide who you think is speaking.<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials and<br />
activities<br />
<br />
How do we select and use supplementary materials and activities?<br />
Supplementary materials are books and o<strong>the</strong>r materials we can use in<br />
addition to <strong>the</strong> coursebook. They include skills development materials,<br />
grammar, vocabulary and phonology practice materials, collections <strong>of</strong><br />
communicative activities and teacher's resource materials. Supplementary<br />
materials may also come from au<strong>the</strong>ntic sources (e.g. newspaper and<br />
magazine articles, video, etc.). Some coursebook packages include<br />
supplementary materials and activities specially designed to fit <strong>the</strong> coursebook<br />
syllabus, and <strong>the</strong>re are also many websites where you can download<br />
supplementary materials. We select supplementary materials and activities first<br />
by recognising that we need something more than (or different from) <strong>the</strong><br />
material in <strong>the</strong> coursebook, and <strong>the</strong>n by knowing where to find <strong>the</strong> most<br />
appropriate kinds <strong>of</strong> material.<br />
Key concepts<br />
Make a list <strong>of</strong> all <strong>the</strong> reasons you can think <strong>of</strong> for using supplementary materials<br />
and activities. What are <strong>the</strong> advantages and disadvantages <strong>of</strong> using <strong>the</strong><br />
supplementary materials in <strong>the</strong> box below?<br />
• a class library <strong>of</strong> graded readers (storybooks that use simple <strong>language</strong>)<br />
• skills practice books<br />
• teacher's resource books<br />
• websites<br />
• videos<br />
• <strong>language</strong> practice books (grammar/vocabulary/phonology)<br />
• electronic materials (CD-ROMs, computer programs)<br />
• games<br />
There are various reasons why we might want to use supplementary materials<br />
and activities. Some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> main reasons are as follows:<br />
• to replace unsuitable material in <strong>the</strong> coursebook<br />
• to fill gaps in <strong>the</strong> coursebook<br />
• to provide suitable material for learners' particular needs and interests e to<br />
give learners extra <strong>language</strong> or skills practice<br />
• to add variety to our <strong>teaching</strong>.<br />
Coursebooks are organised according to a syllabus, and <strong>the</strong>y are <strong>of</strong>ten carefully<br />
graded (i.e. grammatical structures, vocabulary, skills, etc. are presented in a<br />
helpful sequence for <strong>learning</strong>), so that learners' knowledge <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />
[Escribir texto] Página 82
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
builds up step by step through <strong>the</strong> book. Supplementary materials and activities<br />
can provide variety in lessons and useful extra practice, but it is important to<br />
make sure that <strong>the</strong>y fit into <strong>the</strong> learners' programme, are suitable for <strong>the</strong> class<br />
and match <strong>the</strong> aims for particular lessons. Here are some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> .possible<br />
advantages and disadvantages <strong>of</strong> different kinds <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials:<br />
Possible advantages<br />
Possible disadvantages<br />
Class library <strong>of</strong> readers<br />
• encourages extensive<br />
reading<br />
• gives learners confidence<br />
• <strong>language</strong> sometimes too<br />
simple<br />
• may not be challenging<br />
Skills practice books • focus on individual skills • may not fit coursebook<br />
Teacher's resource books • new ideas for lessons • may not suit lesson aims<br />
Websites<br />
Video<br />
Language practice books<br />
Electronic materials<br />
• variety <strong>of</strong> lesson plans,<br />
<strong>teaching</strong> materials, o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
resources<br />
• provides visual context<br />
•source <strong>of</strong> cultural information<br />
• shows body <strong>language</strong><br />
• extra practice • learners can<br />
work alone without teacher's<br />
help<br />
• motivation<br />
• familiar technology for<br />
learners<br />
• sometimes difficult to find <strong>the</strong><br />
right material for <strong>the</strong> learners<br />
• equipment may not always be<br />
available<br />
• <strong>language</strong> may not be graded<br />
• repetitive exercises • little or<br />
no context<br />
• difficult for teacher to control<br />
how learners are working<br />
• little or no human feedback<br />
Carries<br />
• enjoyment<br />
• <strong>language</strong> practice<br />
• may not be suitable for older<br />
learners<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
Selection <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials and activities<br />
• Get to know what supplementary materials are available in your school. Use<br />
a questionnaire or interviews for needs analysis at <strong>the</strong> beginning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
course to find out what you will want to add to <strong>the</strong> coursebook when you are<br />
<strong>planning</strong> your scheme <strong>of</strong> work.<br />
• Supplementary <strong>language</strong> practice materials are not always accompanied by<br />
teacher's books, and <strong>the</strong> aims <strong>of</strong> activities may not be dear. When selecting<br />
material, <strong>the</strong>refore, you need to think about exactly how it will replace or<br />
improve on material in your coursebook.<br />
• It may be useful to use au<strong>the</strong>ntic material (which is not designed for a<br />
particular level), in order to give learners <strong>the</strong> experience <strong>of</strong> working with<br />
more challenging texts and tasks.<br />
• The activities in materials designed to develop individual skills <strong>of</strong>ten include<br />
<strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r skills, e.g. learners need to read a text before <strong>the</strong>y carry out<br />
a listening task, or to do some writing as a follow-up activity after a speaking<br />
activity. When selecting materials and activities, think carefully about all <strong>the</strong><br />
skills that are required.<br />
• Many publishers produce materials for practising separate <strong>language</strong> skills at<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 83
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
different levels. Teacher's resource books, too, usually list tasks and<br />
activities according to level. Before deciding to use <strong>the</strong>se materials,<br />
however, you should check how appropriate <strong>the</strong> level is for your learners.<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y will need to understand or to produce.<br />
Use <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials and activities<br />
• Learners get used to <strong>the</strong> methodology in <strong>the</strong>ir coursebook. If you are using<br />
supplementary materials with very different procedures, you may need to<br />
give special attention to instructions.<br />
• You can adapt many supplementary materials for use with classes at<br />
different levels. The texts used in <strong>the</strong>se materials may not be graded, but<br />
you can grade <strong>the</strong> activities by making <strong>the</strong> learners' tasks more or less<br />
challenging.<br />
• Games and extra communicative activities can provide variety and make<br />
<strong>learning</strong> fun. But you need to think about your reasons for using <strong>the</strong>m, so<br />
that your lesson still has a dear purpose. Older learners may want to know<br />
why <strong>the</strong>y are doing <strong>the</strong>se activities.<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />
Here are ten sets <strong>of</strong> instructions for <strong>the</strong> kinds <strong>of</strong> activities you might find in a<br />
book <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials. For each one, decide:<br />
- what level(s) it is suitable for (i.e. elementary, intermediate, advanced)<br />
- what you think <strong>the</strong> aims are<br />
- what materials (if any) <strong>the</strong> teacher needs to prepare<br />
- if it focuses on particular <strong>language</strong>.<br />
1 In pairs, compare your list <strong>of</strong> ideas for<br />
staying healthy. Then agree on <strong>the</strong> six<br />
most useful ideas. Next, get toge<strong>the</strong>r<br />
with ano<strong>the</strong>r pair and decide on a group<br />
list <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> six best ideas. Put <strong>the</strong>se<br />
ideas in order according to <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
usefulness.<br />
2 Describe <strong>the</strong> picture to your partner<br />
so that s/he can draw it. When you<br />
have finished, compare your pictures<br />
and discuss <strong>the</strong> reasons for any<br />
differences.<br />
3 Send one member <strong>of</strong> your group<br />
outside <strong>the</strong> classroom to read <strong>the</strong> next<br />
sentence. He or she must remember<br />
<strong>the</strong> sentence without writing it down,<br />
<strong>the</strong>n come back and dictate <strong>the</strong><br />
sentence to <strong>the</strong> group.<br />
4 Use your dictionary to find as much<br />
information as you can about your<br />
word. Discuss with <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r students in<br />
your group how <strong>the</strong> meanings <strong>of</strong> your<br />
words are connected and <strong>the</strong>n explain<br />
<strong>the</strong> connections to <strong>the</strong> class.<br />
5 Decide which stories are true and<br />
which are false. Then choose one to tell<br />
to <strong>the</strong> rest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class for <strong>the</strong>m to make<br />
<strong>the</strong> same decision.<br />
6 Read <strong>the</strong> definition to <strong>the</strong> class for<br />
<strong>the</strong>m to guess <strong>the</strong> word.<br />
7 Listen to <strong>the</strong> words on <strong>the</strong> recording<br />
and check whe<strong>the</strong>r you have underlined<br />
<strong>the</strong> correct syllables.<br />
8 Correct <strong>the</strong> text so that it matches <strong>the</strong><br />
information in <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />
9 Write <strong>the</strong> next part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story on <strong>the</strong><br />
[Escribir texto] Página 84
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
computer. When you have finished,<br />
move to <strong>the</strong> next computer and<br />
continue <strong>the</strong> story you see on <strong>the</strong><br />
screen.<br />
10 Go to <strong>the</strong> blackboard and rub out<br />
one word in <strong>the</strong> sentence, so that <strong>the</strong><br />
words that are left on <strong>the</strong> board still<br />
form a correct sentence.<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />
1. There's more than enough material in my coursebook. I don't have time to<br />
use supplementary materials.<br />
2. My students get bored with <strong>the</strong> same book in every lesson, so I use<br />
supplementary materials as <strong>of</strong>ten as I can.<br />
3. I'd like to use supplementary materials more <strong>of</strong>ten, but I find it difficult to fit<br />
<strong>the</strong>m into my syllabus.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-7, choose which book listed A-G could help a teacher who<br />
made <strong>the</strong> following comments.<br />
There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />
Books<br />
A. The internet and <strong>the</strong> Language Classroom Gavin Dudeney, Cambridge<br />
University Press<br />
B. Developing Listening Skills Shelagh Rixon, Prentice Hall<br />
C. Sounds Like This Katie Kitching, Belair Publication Ltd.<br />
D. Simple Speaking Activities Jill Hadfield and Charles Hadfield, Oxford<br />
University Press.<br />
E. Elementary Language Practice Michael Vince, Macmillan<br />
F. Literature in <strong>the</strong> Language Classroom Joanne Collie and Stephen<br />
Slater, Cambridge University Press.<br />
G. Words in Their Places: Graded Cloze Texts and Comprehension<br />
Exercises Lynn Hutchinson Hodder Arnold.<br />
Teacher’s comments<br />
1. L’ve been <strong>teaching</strong> for a long time, but I really need some fresh ideas for<br />
<strong>teaching</strong> grammar to low-level learners.<br />
2. I’m not sure how to use websites for <strong>teaching</strong> English.<br />
3. I’m looking for activities to help my teenage elementary learners develop<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir fluency, but I haven’t got time to do a lot <strong>of</strong> extra preparation.<br />
4. I’m interested in using poems and short stories in my <strong>language</strong> classes.<br />
5. I want a book that explains pronunciation and gives me some ideas<br />
about how to teach it.<br />
6. My learners need lots <strong>of</strong> extra tasks for reading practice, but I haven’t got<br />
time to search for supplementary materials at <strong>the</strong> right level<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 85
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Selection and use <strong>of</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> aids<br />
How do we select and use aids?<br />
Aids are <strong>the</strong> resources and equipment available to us in <strong>the</strong> classroom, as well<br />
as <strong>the</strong> resources we can bring into <strong>the</strong> classroom. They include cassette<br />
recorders, CD players, video recorders and overhead projectors (i.e.<br />
equipment with a light in it that can make images appear larger on a screen),<br />
visual aids (pictures that can help learners understand), realia and <strong>the</strong> teacher<br />
himself/herself! We select and use aids by thinking carefully about <strong>the</strong> main<br />
aims and <strong>the</strong> subsidiary aims <strong>of</strong> a lesson, and <strong>the</strong>n choosing <strong>the</strong> most<br />
appropriate ones.<br />
Key concepts<br />
Look at <strong>the</strong> following list <strong>of</strong> classroom equipment. What o<strong>the</strong>r <strong>teaching</strong> purposes<br />
can you think <strong>of</strong> for each item?<br />
Classroom equipment<br />
blackboard/whiteboard<br />
overhead projector (OHP)<br />
cassette recorder/CD player<br />
video recorder<br />
computer<br />
<strong>language</strong> laboratory<br />
(i.e. a room where learners can<br />
listen to recordings and record<br />
<strong>the</strong>mselves)<br />
A/Iain reaching purpose<br />
writing up planned vocabulary, grammar examples<br />
and explanations<br />
displaying prepared exercises on transparencies<br />
(plastic sheets)<br />
listening practice<br />
listening practice with added visual information<br />
grammar exercises<br />
grammar drills<br />
All <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se aids can be used for many different purposes. Some examples <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>se purposes are:<br />
Blackboard/whiteboard<br />
Video recorder<br />
• writing words and ideas that come up during<br />
<strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
•drawing or displaying pictures<br />
• building up ideas in diagrams, word maps,<br />
etc.<br />
• for learners to write answers<br />
• for whole-class compositions<br />
•for information gap tasks (with one<br />
learner viewing and one just listening)<br />
•viewing without sound and guessing<br />
<strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />
• pausing and predicting <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> (i.e.<br />
saying what you think is coming next)<br />
• with a camera, filming learners' performance<br />
Overhead projector<br />
•displaying results <strong>of</strong> group work<br />
• building up information by putting one<br />
transparency on top <strong>of</strong> ano<strong>the</strong>r<br />
• covering up or gradually uncovering parts <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> transparency<br />
• displaying pictures and diagrams on<br />
Computer<br />
• narrative building with a word <strong>process</strong>or<br />
• supplementary materials for coursebooks<br />
• online <strong>language</strong> tests<br />
• using online dictionaries<br />
• using CD-ROMs<br />
• email exchanges<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 86
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
photocopiable transparencies<br />
Cassette recorder/CD player<br />
• presenting new <strong>language</strong> in dialogues and<br />
stories<br />
• giving models for pronunciation practice<br />
• recording learners' oral performance<br />
• listening for pleasure<br />
• online communication (chatting)<br />
• online newspapers and magazines<br />
• project work using <strong>the</strong> Internet<br />
Language laboratory<br />
• pronunciation practice<br />
• extensive listening<br />
• monitoring and giving feedback to<br />
individual learners<br />
•developing speaking skills<br />
O<strong>the</strong>r aids are: realia, flashcards (cards small enough to hold up one after<br />
ano<strong>the</strong>r, with simple drawings or single words or phrases on <strong>the</strong>m), puppets<br />
(models <strong>of</strong> people or animals that you can move by putting your hand inside<br />
<strong>the</strong>m), charts -(diagrams that show information) and <strong>the</strong> teacher.<br />
What different uses can you think <strong>of</strong> for <strong>the</strong>se aids? Here are some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> most<br />
important uses:<br />
Realia<br />
Real objects that we can easily bring into <strong>the</strong> classroom can be used to teach<br />
vocabulary, as prompts for practising grammatical structures or for building<br />
dialogues and narratives, for games and quizzes. Realia also include real texts,<br />
such as menus, timetables, leaflets, etc.<br />
Flashcards<br />
Like realia, flashcards can be used for <strong>teaching</strong> individual words or as prompts<br />
for practising grammatical structures.<br />
Puppets<br />
Puppets are an excellent resource for <strong>teaching</strong> young learners. For example,<br />
we can introduce new <strong>language</strong> in dialogues between pairs <strong>of</strong> puppets (or<br />
between one puppet and <strong>the</strong> teacher). Children can also make <strong>the</strong>ir own simple<br />
puppets.<br />
Charts<br />
We can use posters and wallcharts (drawings or graphs that can be put on <strong>the</strong><br />
wall <strong>of</strong> a classroom) to display larger, more detailed pictures, or a series <strong>of</strong><br />
pictures telling a story or showing related objects in a lexical set. A phonemic<br />
chart shows <strong>the</strong> phonemic symbols and <strong>the</strong> positions in <strong>the</strong> mouth where <strong>the</strong><br />
different sounds are made. The teacher can point at <strong>the</strong> symbols to prompt<br />
learners to correct <strong>the</strong>ir pronunciation. We can also use charts to display<br />
diagrams, prepared drawings and tables <strong>of</strong> irregular verbs, or to build up a<br />
class dictionary.<br />
The teacher<br />
The teacher can use hand gestures, facial expressions and mime (actions<br />
which express meaning without words) to elicit vocabulary items, clarify<br />
meaning and create context. We can also build up a set <strong>of</strong> signals, such as<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 87
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
finger correction, which learners recognise as prompts to correct <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />
mistakes.<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
• It is a good idea to divide <strong>the</strong> blackboard or whiteboard into different<br />
sections for different purposes, as in this example:<br />
Reference material (e.g.<br />
key lexis, model<br />
sentences, grammar rules,<br />
etc.)<br />
Lesson materials (e.g.<br />
pictures, key grammatical<br />
structures, dialogues, etc.)<br />
at different stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
lesson<br />
Vocabulary notepad for<br />
noting all new words<br />
You can include diagrams like this in your lesson plan for different stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
lesson.<br />
Aids that you can prepare in advance, like charts, flashcards and<br />
transparencies for <strong>the</strong> overhead projector, will help you to make sure that<br />
lesson procedures match your aims. Ano<strong>the</strong>r advantage is that you can save<br />
such aids and reuse <strong>the</strong>m in future lessons.<br />
Make sure that you check any equipment before <strong>the</strong> lesson. Use <strong>the</strong><br />
counters on cassette recorders and video recorders to make a note <strong>of</strong> where<br />
recordings begin, so that you can find <strong>the</strong> place easily when you rewind.<br />
If you use computers or <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> laboratory, advance preparation is<br />
essential. You need to plan all your instructions very carefully, as well as <strong>the</strong><br />
sequence <strong>of</strong> activities for <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />
FOLLOW –UP ACTIVITY<br />
Which aids do you think <strong>the</strong>se teachers are talking about?<br />
1. I can prepare lots <strong>of</strong> material in advance, and I don't have to make lots <strong>of</strong><br />
photocopies.<br />
2. It gives me a chance to listen to all <strong>the</strong> learners individually.<br />
3. Whenever I travel abroad, I collect all kinds <strong>of</strong> things to use in class.<br />
4. .I use <strong>the</strong>m as prompts for a dialogue with <strong>the</strong> whole class, <strong>the</strong>n give<br />
<strong>the</strong>m out to pairs so <strong>the</strong>y can practise.<br />
5. I always use one part <strong>of</strong> it as a kind <strong>of</strong> notebook for new words.<br />
6. It gives learners <strong>the</strong> most realistic kind <strong>of</strong> listening practice.<br />
7. This helps with tests, grammar and vocabulary exercises, dictionary<br />
work, research -just about everything.<br />
REFLECTION<br />
1 Think about <strong>the</strong> aids you use most <strong>of</strong>ten. What learner characteristics<br />
make some aids more successful than o<strong>the</strong>rs in different classes?<br />
2 What are <strong>the</strong> advantages and disadvantages <strong>of</strong> using technical<br />
equipment in <strong>the</strong> classroom? (For example, think about <strong>planning</strong>,<br />
motivation and technical problems.)<br />
3 Which aids are <strong>the</strong> most motivating for your learners? (For example,<br />
younger learners may learn best through playing games, while teenagers<br />
may enjoy working with computers.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 88
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-7, match <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> purposes with <strong>the</strong> aids listen A-H<br />
There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />
Teaching purposes<br />
AIDS<br />
A. Realia<br />
B. OHP<br />
C. Puppets<br />
D. Video<br />
E. Self-access centre<br />
F. Computer<br />
G. Phonemic chart<br />
H. Blackboard/whiteboard<br />
1. To show learners pictures or answer to tasks prepared before <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
2. To remind learners about pronunciation<br />
3. For learners to work by <strong>the</strong>mselves and improve <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
4. To give learners listening practice with visual context<br />
5. To note down new vocabulary items throughout <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
6. To bring small things from <strong>the</strong> world outside into <strong>the</strong> classroom<br />
7. To ask learners to find information for project work independently.<br />
MANAGING THE TEACHING AND LEARNING PROCESS<br />
PART 1 Teachers' and learners' <strong>language</strong> for <strong>the</strong> classroom<br />
How do we use <strong>language</strong> appropriately for a range <strong>of</strong> classroom functions?<br />
Using <strong>language</strong> appropriately means we use <strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong> classroom which<br />
best suits <strong>the</strong> learners and <strong>the</strong> situation. Classroom functions are <strong>the</strong> purposes<br />
for which teachers and learners use <strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong> classroom. For teachers,<br />
<strong>the</strong>se purposes include, for example, "to manage activities and <strong>learning</strong>, to<br />
explain <strong>learning</strong> points and to move smoothly from one stage <strong>of</strong> a lesson to <strong>the</strong><br />
next.<br />
Key concepts<br />
What are some common classroom functions used by <strong>the</strong> teacher? Here are<br />
some classroom functions that are <strong>of</strong>ten used by <strong>the</strong> teacher:<br />
Instructing. We give instructions (i.e. tell learners what to do) at different<br />
stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson, for example at <strong>the</strong> beginning <strong>of</strong> an activity. The <strong>language</strong><br />
<strong>of</strong> instructions is <strong>of</strong>ten <strong>the</strong> imperative, particularly for young learners and for<br />
beginners, as in 'Open your books at page 12'. For learners at higher levels, we<br />
might use o<strong>the</strong>r <strong>language</strong> forms,-for example: Tor this activity, you're going to<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 89
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
work in pairs<br />
Explaining. We might explain to learners how to do an activity, how to organise<br />
a project') <strong>the</strong>y are doing, <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> vocabulary or why a correction is<br />
needed. For example, when explaining about project work we might say: 'We'll<br />
put <strong>the</strong> project work on <strong>the</strong> walls so you need to make sure that everything is<br />
easy to read and that it looks wonderful/<br />
Narrating. Narrating is telling a story or talking about something that has<br />
happened. In <strong>the</strong> primary classroom we <strong>of</strong>ten tell stories to learners. In<br />
secondary and adult classrooms are may tell stories too, but we might more<br />
<strong>of</strong>ten talk about past experiences and things that have) happened in our lives.<br />
Eliciting. Eliciting is when we get information from our learners ra<strong>the</strong>r than<br />
giving it <strong>the</strong>m. This information can be about topics or <strong>language</strong>. For example,<br />
we can show learner a picture and ask 'What can you see in <strong>the</strong> picture?' We<br />
can also ask learners to give us gene information, e.g. what a-certain animal<br />
eats.<br />
Prompting learners. Prompting is when we say something to help learners<br />
think <strong>of</strong> ideas, or to remember a word or phrase by giving <strong>the</strong>m part <strong>of</strong> it. For<br />
example, we could say to learners at <strong>the</strong> start <strong>of</strong> a story telling activity ‘You<br />
could start <strong>the</strong> story with this picture’, or if a learner can't remember a word, we<br />
could help <strong>the</strong>m with <strong>the</strong> first sound, such as com for competition,<br />
Correcting. We can correct learners by using <strong>language</strong> to indicate where or<br />
how <strong>the</strong>y have made a mistake.<br />
Checking <strong>learning</strong>. We check <strong>learning</strong> all <strong>the</strong> time during our lessons, but we<br />
do this most <strong>of</strong>ten after we have presented new <strong>language</strong>, and at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> a<br />
lesson to give us information for <strong>planning</strong> <strong>the</strong> next lesson(s). We can use<br />
concept questions to check learners' understanding, for example: 'Can anyone<br />
give me a sentence using this word?'<br />
Conveying <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> new <strong>language</strong>. When we convey meaning we<br />
show <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> new words or structures. We can do this in a number <strong>of</strong><br />
ways, such as bringing in realia, using mime or by asking concept questions.<br />
We may want to explain <strong>the</strong> meaning, to demonstrate it, or in some situations<br />
where <strong>the</strong> meaning is very difficult to explain in English, to translate it.<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
The <strong>language</strong> we use in <strong>the</strong> classroom must be appropriate for <strong>the</strong> classroom<br />
function and for <strong>the</strong> level and age <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners. For example, we should not<br />
use <strong>language</strong> that is too formal with primary learners or <strong>language</strong> that is too<br />
babyish with older learners.<br />
We need to grade our <strong>language</strong> to suit <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> level and age <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
[Escribir texto] Página 90
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
learners. Grading <strong>language</strong> means choosing to use classroom <strong>language</strong> that is<br />
at or below <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> level <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners. For example, with beginners we<br />
use simple words and phrases, but with higher-level learners our <strong>language</strong> can<br />
be more complex. Grading means that our <strong>language</strong> is at <strong>the</strong> right level for <strong>the</strong><br />
learners to understand.<br />
We need to sequence our <strong>language</strong> appropriately to provide learners with<br />
<strong>learning</strong> opportunities. Sequencing means using <strong>language</strong> in a logical order.<br />
This is particularly important for explanations and instructions, for example:<br />
'Listen. Work with a partner.’ ra<strong>the</strong>r than 'Work with a partner. Listen.<br />
Learners can learn classroom <strong>language</strong>, just by hearing it again and again. So<br />
it is important to use <strong>the</strong> same classroom <strong>language</strong> for classroom functions at<br />
<strong>the</strong> early stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>learning</strong>, for example: 'Open your books and look at page<br />
....We can <strong>the</strong>n build up <strong>the</strong>se phrases to suit <strong>the</strong> learners' level and age.<br />
We need to think about <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> we are going to use for different<br />
classroom functions and make sure <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> use is appropriate <strong>language</strong><br />
will use <strong>the</strong> clear. If we do not plan or think about <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> we use, we<br />
might use <strong>the</strong> LI, or <strong>language</strong> which is too complex, which would not be helpful<br />
to <strong>learning</strong>.<br />
FOLLOW UP ACTIVITIES<br />
1. Look at <strong>the</strong> list <strong>of</strong> classroom functions in Key concepts above, and at <strong>the</strong><br />
activities carried out by a teacher below. At which stage <strong>of</strong> a lesson might<br />
you use <strong>the</strong> different classroom functions? You will find that you can use<br />
more than one classroom function at each stage.<br />
Stages <strong>of</strong> a lesson<br />
A. Presenting new vocabulary<br />
B. Telling <strong>the</strong> class a story and encouraging <strong>the</strong>m to join in<br />
C. Brainstorming ideas for a writing task with <strong>the</strong> whole class<br />
D. Monitoring learners during a controlled practice activity<br />
E. Giving feedback after a task<br />
2. Read this teacher's instructions to children on how to make a rabbit (bunny)<br />
puppet. Which <strong>language</strong> form does <strong>the</strong> teacher use for each instruction and<br />
which conjunctions does she use to sequence <strong>the</strong> instructions?<br />
Now watch me first. Take <strong>the</strong> scissors and cut. Start with <strong>the</strong> bunny's head.<br />
OK, be careful. Cut round <strong>the</strong> head and now his big ears ... his big ears that<br />
go flop, flop, flop. And up <strong>the</strong> ear and down again and round his head.<br />
Then, cut here round <strong>the</strong> bunny's face and round his shoulder and down<br />
round his body and now down to his feet.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 91
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />
1. I don't need to plan <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> I use for giving instructions. I just think<br />
<strong>of</strong> what to say at <strong>the</strong> time and I know when my learners understand.<br />
2. My learners speak <strong>the</strong> same LI as I do. So it's much better to use <strong>the</strong><br />
mo<strong>the</strong>r tongue for setting up activities and checking understanding.<br />
3. I have a collection <strong>of</strong> different phrases that I use for managing my<br />
classes. I choose from <strong>the</strong>se phrases when I am <strong>planning</strong> my lessons. I<br />
teach different levels, but I find I can use <strong>the</strong> same <strong>language</strong> for each<br />
level.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-5, look at <strong>the</strong> following situations and three possible things a<br />
teacher could say. Choose <strong>the</strong> most appropriate option A, B or C.<br />
1. In a class <strong>of</strong> primary children <strong>of</strong> 9-10 years <strong>of</strong> age, <strong>the</strong> learners are finishing<br />
a pairwork task. The teacher wants to check <strong>the</strong> answers with <strong>the</strong> class.<br />
A. What's <strong>the</strong> answer to number 1? Hands up, please.<br />
B. Can any <strong>of</strong> you possibly tell me what you think might be <strong>the</strong> answer<br />
for <strong>the</strong> first question?<br />
C. Answer?<br />
2. In a class <strong>of</strong> teenagers in <strong>the</strong>ir second year <strong>of</strong>-English, <strong>the</strong> teacher has just<br />
presented a new grammatical structure and wants to check that <strong>the</strong> learners<br />
understand <strong>the</strong> meaning.<br />
A. Does everyone understand?<br />
B. Who can give me an example sentence?<br />
C. Please explain <strong>the</strong> meaning.<br />
3. A group <strong>of</strong> businessmen are doing a discussion activity. The teacher notices<br />
a learner has made a mistake and says:<br />
A That's wrong.<br />
B A bad answer.<br />
C Is that quite right?<br />
4. In a class <strong>of</strong> adult learners <strong>of</strong> mixed levels, <strong>the</strong> teacher is giving <strong>the</strong> first<br />
instruction for a complex group activity.<br />
A. A You all know what to do so you can start.<br />
B. B First, get into <strong>the</strong> groups you were in yesterday.<br />
C. C Here's <strong>the</strong> handout for <strong>the</strong> activity. You can start.<br />
5. The teacher is telling a story to a class <strong>of</strong> very young primary learners who<br />
have only been <strong>learning</strong> English for one month.<br />
A. Here is a little boy. Look. One day ...<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 92
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
B. This is a story about a little boy who used to live in <strong>the</strong> city.<br />
C. Stories are very important for you. They will help you learn new<br />
grammar.<br />
Identifying <strong>the</strong> Functions <strong>of</strong> Learners’ Language<br />
How do we identify <strong>the</strong> functions <strong>of</strong> learners' <strong>language</strong>?<br />
The functions <strong>of</strong> learners' <strong>language</strong> are <strong>the</strong> purposes for which learners use<br />
<strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong> classroom. These purposes include taking part in tasks and.<br />
activities, asking questions <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher, interacting with each o<strong>the</strong>r. Examples<br />
<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> functions <strong>of</strong> learners' <strong>language</strong> are asking for clarification from <strong>the</strong><br />
teacher or o<strong>the</strong>r learners, and checking information or understanding.<br />
Key concepts<br />
Can you think <strong>of</strong> some common functions <strong>of</strong> learners' <strong>language</strong>?<br />
Read through this description <strong>of</strong> a lesson. There are examples <strong>of</strong> learners'<br />
<strong>language</strong> functions for each stage.<br />
Learners'<br />
functions<br />
Greeting<br />
<strong>language</strong><br />
Asking for clarification<br />
Checking information<br />
and understanding<br />
Saying goodbye<br />
Teacher's and /earners' actions<br />
The teacher enters <strong>the</strong> classroom and <strong>the</strong> learners say 'Good<br />
morning'. The teacher hands out a reading text and gives<br />
learners instructions for <strong>the</strong> reading task.<br />
The learners check <strong>the</strong> instructions with <strong>the</strong> teacher by asking<br />
'Can you explain that again please? What do we have to do? ’<br />
The learners complete <strong>the</strong> reading task individually. The learners<br />
check <strong>the</strong>ir answers in pairs. They say, e.g. 'What answer do you<br />
have for number 4? I doesn’t understand <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> this<br />
word. Do you know what it means?' The teacher checks <strong>the</strong><br />
answers.<br />
The lesson ends. The learners say 'Goodbye' to each o<strong>the</strong>r and<br />
to <strong>the</strong> teacher.<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
Learners need a range <strong>of</strong> classroom <strong>language</strong> so that <strong>the</strong>y can interact<br />
appropriately with each o<strong>the</strong>r and with <strong>the</strong> teacher. The <strong>language</strong> that learners<br />
need for interacting with each\ o<strong>the</strong>r may sometimes be quite formal, and at<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r times more relaxed, depending on who is in <strong>the</strong> group. The <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y<br />
need for interacting with <strong>the</strong> teacher is <strong>of</strong>ten neutral or more formal.<br />
Learners need to know special words and phrases for certain games and<br />
activities. For example, It's my turn I It's your turn I I’m first I after you I I’ve won,<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 93
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
We need to teach our learners <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> for a range <strong>of</strong> learners' classroom<br />
functions. We also need to teach <strong>the</strong>m to understand <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> for a range<br />
<strong>of</strong> teacher classroom functions. This <strong>language</strong> is not usually taught in <strong>the</strong><br />
coursebook. When we plan tasks and activities we need to think about what<br />
<strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners need to do <strong>the</strong> tasks. If learners do not know how to ask<br />
for an explanation or clarification, <strong>the</strong>y will use <strong>the</strong>ir L1.<br />
FOLLOW – UP ACTIVITIES<br />
1. Here are eight examples <strong>of</strong> learner <strong>language</strong>. Which function does each one<br />
express?<br />
A. Can you say that again, please?<br />
B. I don't have <strong>the</strong> same answer.<br />
C. See you tomorrow.<br />
D. Is it paged 25 or 35?<br />
E. What do you think?<br />
F. Yes, I totally agree with you.<br />
G. Well, I think this is <strong>the</strong> best answer.<br />
H. Hi!<br />
2. Each <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following sets <strong>of</strong> exponents A-D expresses one function <strong>of</strong><br />
learners' <strong>language</strong>, which function does each set express?<br />
A<br />
How about starting with number five?<br />
Let's do this toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Why don't we ask one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
groups?<br />
C<br />
It's great to see you again. How are<br />
you? Good morning.<br />
B<br />
Can you give an example for number<br />
4? Can I use this word to talk about<br />
myself? Does this mean <strong>the</strong> same<br />
thing?<br />
D<br />
My answer's <strong>the</strong> same as yours.<br />
Yes, that's right.<br />
That's my opinion, too.<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you I agree with and<br />
why?<br />
1. I don't think learners need English for classroom functions. They can use<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir L1.<br />
2. My learners usually use <strong>the</strong>ir LI when <strong>the</strong>y work in groups and when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
ask me questions. I don't think <strong>the</strong>y know how to say <strong>the</strong>se things in<br />
English.<br />
3. I put examples <strong>of</strong> appropriate <strong>language</strong> for classroom functions on <strong>the</strong><br />
walls <strong>of</strong> my classroom to prompt my learners.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 94
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
For questions 1-5, look at <strong>the</strong> situations and three possible functions. Choose<br />
<strong>the</strong> correct option A, B or C.<br />
1. A learner does not hear <strong>the</strong> instructions <strong>the</strong> teacher gives. He needs to<br />
A. ask for repetition.<br />
B. express agreement.<br />
C. <strong>of</strong>fer an opinion<br />
2. A learner does not understand <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> a new word. She needs to:<br />
A. express doubt<br />
B. give advice<br />
C. ask for clarification<br />
3. A learner has an idea about how to begin a pairwork activity. He needs to:<br />
A. make a suggestion.<br />
B. make a comparison<br />
C. express disagreement.<br />
4. A learner thinks she has misunderstood a word. She needs to:<br />
A. give an example<br />
B. check meaning.<br />
C. ask for an opinion.<br />
5. learner wants to encourage a shy learner in group work. He needs to:<br />
A. check information<br />
B. invite him to speak<br />
C. explain his meaning<br />
Categorizing learners' mistakes<br />
• How do we categorize learners' mistakes?<br />
Mistakes show problems ei<strong>the</strong>r with accuracy, i.e. using <strong>the</strong> correct form <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>language</strong>, or with communication, i.e. sharing information dearly. Learners can<br />
make oral or written mistakes. Oral mistakes are mistakes learners make when<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are speaking. They make mistakes in <strong>the</strong> accuracy <strong>of</strong>, for example,<br />
grammar, pronunciation or vocabulary or in <strong>the</strong> degree <strong>of</strong> formality <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y use. In written <strong>language</strong>, learners may make mistakes, for<br />
example, in grammar, spelling, paragraphing, ordering <strong>of</strong> information or<br />
punctuation. Learners' mistakes can be errors or slips. Learners 'are usually<br />
able to correct slips <strong>the</strong>mselves.<br />
• Key concepts<br />
Oral mistakes<br />
Look at <strong>the</strong> following examples <strong>of</strong> learners' oral mistakes. There are mistakes <strong>of</strong><br />
accuracy (grammar, pronunciation, vocabulary) and appropriacy. Can you<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 95
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
identify <strong>the</strong>m?<br />
1. She like this picture. (Talking about present habit)<br />
2. Shut up! (Said to a classmate)<br />
3. I wear my suit in <strong>the</strong> sea.<br />
4. Do you know where is <strong>the</strong> post <strong>of</strong>fice?<br />
5. The dog /biit/ me. (Talking about a dog attacking someone)<br />
6. What /haepan ‘ed/?<br />
Accuracy<br />
Examples 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6 all contain examples <strong>of</strong> inaccurate <strong>language</strong>.<br />
• In Example 1 <strong>the</strong>re is a grammar mistake. The learner has missed <strong>the</strong> third<br />
person s from <strong>the</strong> verb. The learner should have said 'She likes this picture'.<br />
• In Example 3 <strong>the</strong>re is a vocabulary mistake. The learner has used suit<br />
instead <strong>of</strong> swimsuit. The learner should have said 'I wear my swimsuit in <strong>the</strong><br />
sea'.<br />
• In Example 4 <strong>the</strong>re is a grammar mistake. The learner has put <strong>the</strong> subject<br />
and verb in <strong>the</strong> wrong order in <strong>the</strong> indirect question. The learner should have<br />
said 'Do you know where <strong>the</strong> post <strong>of</strong>fice is?'<br />
• In Example 5 <strong>the</strong>re is a pronunciation mistake. The learner has used <strong>the</strong><br />
long /ii/ sound when she should have used <strong>the</strong> short /i/ sound. The learner<br />
should have said 'The dog /bit/ me'.<br />
• In Example 6 <strong>the</strong>re is a pronunciation mistake. The learner has stressed <strong>the</strong><br />
final syllable <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> word happened, making it into a three-syllable word<br />
when it is in fact pronounced as a two-syllable word /'haepand/<br />
Appropriacy<br />
Example 2 contains an example <strong>of</strong> inappropriate <strong>language</strong>. Although Example<br />
2 is accurate, <strong>the</strong>re is a problem with appropriacy. It is rude to say 'Shut up!' in<br />
<strong>the</strong> classroom. The learner should have said 'Can you be quiet, please?', or<br />
something similar.<br />
Written mistakes<br />
As with oral mistakes, <strong>the</strong>se can also be categorised into slips or errors in<br />
accuracy or appropriacy, or errors in communication.<br />
Have a look at this story written by a learner. In <strong>the</strong> margin, <strong>the</strong>re is a code<br />
written by <strong>the</strong> teacher to show different kinds <strong>of</strong> mistakes. Can you work out<br />
what <strong>the</strong> code means?<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 96
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
My Best Friend<br />
I going to tell you about my best Friend. Her name is Betty. She is tall and has<br />
got long hair dark. Her Favourite Food is chocolate and her Favourite drink is<br />
cola. Her hobbies are writting short stories and looking at TV. At <strong>the</strong> weekend<br />
we go shopping in <strong>the</strong> mall and meet our Friends. Its Fun!<br />
The teacher has used a correction code to indicate <strong>the</strong> types <strong>of</strong> mistakes in<br />
accuracy that <strong>the</strong> learner has made. This enables learners to make <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />
corrections. Here is an explanation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> letters and symbols:<br />
= word missing<br />
There is a word missing in <strong>the</strong> first line. The learner has written 'I<br />
going’ when it should be 'I am going'.<br />
= wrong word order<br />
There is a word order mistake in line 2. The sentence 'She is tall<br />
and has got long hair dark' should be 'She is tall and has got long<br />
dark hair'.<br />
= wrong spelling<br />
There is a spelling mistake in line 3. The word 'writting' should be<br />
'writing'.<br />
= wrong vocabulary<br />
There is a vocabulary mistake in line 4. The learner has used<br />
'looking at’ When <strong>the</strong> correct word is 'watching'.<br />
= punctuation (comma, full stop, etc.)<br />
The learner has used <strong>the</strong> wrong punctuation in line 5. The learner<br />
has written Its' when <strong>the</strong> correct version is 'It's'.<br />
O<strong>the</strong>r common categories in a correction code are:<br />
I/I = good sentence or expression<br />
|prep | = wrong preposition<br />
[A] = wrong agreement, for example She like<br />
? Ask me (I don't understand)<br />
T wrong verb tense t<br />
/ too many words<br />
It makes learners lose motivation if we correct every mistake <strong>the</strong>y make. We<br />
need to make sure our corrections are appropriate for <strong>the</strong> level and <strong>learning</strong><br />
style <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learner and for <strong>the</strong> focus <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> task.<br />
• Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
• There are different reasons for <strong>the</strong> mistakes that learners make. For example:<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 97
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
<strong>the</strong>y may not have learnt <strong>the</strong> word or <strong>the</strong> structure yet; <strong>the</strong>y may be using a<br />
word or structure from <strong>the</strong>ir first <strong>language</strong> by mistake; <strong>the</strong>y may have been<br />
introduced to <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> but may still need more time to <strong>process</strong> it or practise<br />
using it; <strong>the</strong>y may have great difficulty making certain sounds; <strong>the</strong>y may have<br />
writing or spelling problems in <strong>the</strong>ir first <strong>language</strong>; <strong>the</strong>y may need more time to<br />
check and edit <strong>the</strong>ir writing. The reason why a mistake is made influences <strong>the</strong><br />
way we correct it.<br />
• There are different techniques we can use to correct oral and written<br />
mistakes.<br />
• Mistakes can be a very positive aspect <strong>of</strong> <strong>learning</strong>. They show us that<br />
<strong>learning</strong> is taking place and that learners are taking risks with <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong>.<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITY<br />
Here is ano<strong>the</strong>r example <strong>of</strong> a learner's writing. Look at <strong>the</strong> underlined words and<br />
decide which symbol in <strong>the</strong> correction code you would use for each one.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> post people used, to travel on train or on -foot. Now <strong>the</strong>y usually travel<br />
by plane and, by car. I like trains. Train are very confortable and, you can to<br />
read, or talk to your •friends. Planes are -fast and, <strong>the</strong>y were more expensive.<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />
1 It's very difficult to ignore mistakes in spelling or grammar. They seem to be<br />
<strong>the</strong> most important thing so I feel I have to correct <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
2 Learners think we're not doing our job if we don't correct all <strong>the</strong>ir mistakes.<br />
3 It's easier to correct mistakes in accuracy than in communication.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-6, match <strong>the</strong> examples <strong>of</strong> learner mistakes in written work with<br />
<strong>the</strong> types <strong>of</strong> mistake listed A-G.<br />
There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />
Learner mistakes<br />
4 She arrived to <strong>the</strong> station early.<br />
5 We listened <strong>the</strong> music before we went out.<br />
6 I live in very cheap accommodation near <strong>the</strong> school.<br />
7 This is a picture <strong>of</strong> my uncles sister.<br />
8 He hurt one <strong>of</strong> his foot fingers.<br />
9 He wore a coat black.<br />
Types <strong>of</strong> mistake<br />
A. wrong punctuation<br />
B. wrong spelling<br />
C. wrong word order<br />
D. wrong preposition<br />
E. word missing<br />
F. wrong agreement<br />
G. wrong vocabulary<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 98
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 99
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Third stage<br />
Contends<br />
Classroom management.<br />
Teacher roles<br />
Grouping learners<br />
Correcting learns<br />
Giving feedback<br />
Elaboration <strong>of</strong> Didactic material<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 100
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Teacher roles<br />
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT<br />
What are teacher roles?<br />
During a lesson <strong>the</strong> teacher needs to manage <strong>the</strong> activities and <strong>the</strong> learners in<br />
<strong>the</strong> classroom in different ways. This means he or she needs to behave in<br />
different ways at different stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson. These different kinds <strong>of</strong><br />
behaviour are called 'teacher roles'.<br />
Key concepts<br />
Which roles does a teacher use in a lesson?<br />
Every teacher changes roles during a lesson. These roles will be appropriate to<br />
<strong>the</strong> type <strong>of</strong> lesson, activities, lesson aims and <strong>the</strong> level and age <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners.<br />
At different times we may, for example, act as a planner, an informer, a<br />
manager, a parent or friend, or a monitor. For example, when learners are<br />
doing a role-play, one role we have is to make sure that <strong>the</strong>y are doing what<br />
we want <strong>the</strong>m to do. This is called monitoring. When we present new <strong>language</strong><br />
to <strong>the</strong> class, our role is to inform and explain to our learners. Here are some<br />
roles teachers <strong>of</strong>ten use.<br />
Role<br />
The teacher:<br />
1 Planner prepares and thinks through <strong>the</strong> lesson in detail before <strong>teaching</strong> it so<br />
that it has variety and <strong>the</strong>re are appropriate activities for <strong>the</strong> different<br />
learners in <strong>the</strong> class.<br />
2 Informer gives <strong>the</strong> learners detailed information about <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> or about an<br />
activity.<br />
3 Manager organises <strong>the</strong> <strong>learning</strong> space, makes sure everything in <strong>the</strong> classroom is<br />
running smoothly and sets up rules and routines (i.e. things which are<br />
done regularly) for behaviour.<br />
4 Monitor goes around <strong>the</strong> class during individual, pair and group work activities,<br />
checking <strong>learning</strong>.<br />
5 Involver makes sure all <strong>the</strong> learners are taking part in <strong>the</strong> activities.<br />
6 Parent/Friend comforts learners when <strong>the</strong>y are upset or unhappy.<br />
7 Diagnostician is able to recognise <strong>the</strong> cause <strong>of</strong> learners' difficulties.<br />
8 Resource can be used by <strong>the</strong> learners for help and advice.<br />
There are certain roles that we usually use at certain stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson. For<br />
example, we are planners before <strong>the</strong> lesson and may be monitors during group<br />
work and pairwork activities. Sometimes we take on more than one role at <strong>the</strong><br />
same time. For example, we might monitor and explain if a pair <strong>of</strong> learners is<br />
having problems with an activity: we monitor to see how well <strong>the</strong>y are doing and<br />
we explain to help <strong>the</strong>m do better. There are various names for <strong>the</strong> different<br />
roles <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher. The ones above are very common.<br />
<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 101
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
• We need to choose teacher roles which are appropriate to <strong>the</strong> age and level<br />
<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners, <strong>the</strong> stage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> activity. This<br />
means we need to think about our roles when we are <strong>planning</strong> lessons and<br />
be ready to use different roles during our lessons.<br />
• The correct choice <strong>of</strong> appropriate teacher roles will help our lessons run<br />
more smoothly and will make <strong>learning</strong> and <strong>teaching</strong> more effective.<br />
• Some roles are more suitable for young learner classes than for adult<br />
classes, e.g. parent or friend.<br />
• Our roles change at different stages <strong>of</strong> our <strong>teaching</strong>:<br />
Before <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
- We are planners <strong>of</strong> our materials to make sure that <strong>the</strong> lesson is suitable<br />
for <strong>the</strong> learners and for <strong>the</strong> <strong>learning</strong> purpose.<br />
- We are also diagnosticians <strong>of</strong> our learners' problems.<br />
During <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
• When we are presenting new <strong>language</strong> or new vocabulary to <strong>the</strong> learners,<br />
we are informers.<br />
• When we are setting up activities, we are managers.<br />
• When learners are doing activities, we are monitors, diagnosticians,<br />
managers and a resource.<br />
• When <strong>the</strong>re are problems with discipline, we are managers and sometimes a<br />
parent or a friend.<br />
After <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />
• When we think about how successful <strong>the</strong> lesson was, what <strong>the</strong> learners<br />
understood and were able to do and what <strong>the</strong>y had problems with, we are<br />
diagnosticians and planners. We look at our scheme <strong>of</strong> work to check if <strong>the</strong><br />
next lesson is appropriately planned.<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTYVITY<br />
Here are some examples <strong>of</strong> teacher <strong>language</strong> at different stages <strong>of</strong> a lesson.<br />
What do you think is <strong>the</strong> teacher's role in each one?<br />
1 Teacher to a pair <strong>of</strong> learners doing pairwork: 'How are you doing? Is<br />
everything OK?'<br />
2 Teacher to <strong>the</strong> whole class: 'We add er to make <strong>the</strong> comparative form <strong>of</strong><br />
one-syllable adjectives.'<br />
3 Teacher to a young learner: 'Does your finger hurt? Let me have a look.'<br />
4 Teacher to <strong>the</strong> whole class: 'Right, everyone stand up and turn to face your<br />
partner.'<br />
5 Teacher to <strong>the</strong> whole class: 'I think I know why you are having problems.'<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />
1 I like my class to be organised and I like to be in control. I think my main<br />
roles are to inform and manage. That's what <strong>the</strong> learners want.<br />
2 I believe that my role is to enable <strong>the</strong> learners to learn for <strong>the</strong>mselves, so I<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 102
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
involve everyone and try not to control <strong>the</strong> learners and <strong>the</strong> activities too<br />
much.<br />
3 I teach young children. Most <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> time I am more a parent than a teacher.<br />
But, in my opinion, <strong>the</strong> most important teacher roles are <strong>planning</strong> and<br />
organising, especially with children.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-5, match <strong>the</strong> descriptions <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher’s roles with <strong>the</strong> roles<br />
listed A-F.<br />
There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />
ROLES<br />
A. An informer<br />
B. A monitor<br />
C. A diagnostician<br />
D. An involver<br />
E. A planner<br />
F. A manager<br />
Descriptions <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher´s roles<br />
1. Before <strong>the</strong> lesson, she is ……..when she thinks about and prepares what<br />
she is going to teach.<br />
2. She is ………….when she presents new <strong>language</strong> to learners.<br />
3. She is…………..when she organises group work or pairwork activities<br />
4. She is…………..when she goes around <strong>the</strong> class and helps learners<br />
when <strong>the</strong>y are working on activities.<br />
5. She is …………….when she encourages all <strong>the</strong> learners to take part in<br />
<strong>the</strong> activities.<br />
Grouping students<br />
<br />
How do we group students?<br />
Grouping students is using different ways to organise our students when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
are working in <strong>the</strong> classroom. We usually organise <strong>the</strong>m to work in different<br />
ways during each lesson. The groupings we choose depend on <strong>the</strong> type <strong>of</strong><br />
activity, <strong>the</strong> students and <strong>the</strong> aim <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> activity.<br />
Key concepts<br />
What are <strong>the</strong> different ways we group students in <strong>the</strong> classroom?<br />
There are two different ways in which <strong>the</strong> teacher can group students in <strong>the</strong><br />
classroom. The first is when she chooses particular interaction patterns for <strong>the</strong><br />
students, i.e. ways in which students work toge<strong>the</strong>r and with <strong>the</strong> teacher in<br />
class. They include open class, group work, pairwork and individual work, and<br />
<strong>the</strong> teacher to student(s) and student(s) to teacher. In this table you can see<br />
examples <strong>of</strong> different interaction patterns.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 103
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Teaching purpose: Why? Activity: What? Interaction pattern: How?<br />
Review students' knowledge<br />
<strong>of</strong> vocabulary and/or structure<br />
and <strong>the</strong> topic or context<br />
Brainstorming<br />
1.Groups: students to students<br />
(Ss ↔Ss)<br />
2.Feedback: students to<br />
teacher (Ss-T)<br />
Check students'<br />
understanding <strong>of</strong> new<br />
vocabulary<br />
Give students practice in<br />
scanning<br />
Bingo game<br />
Reading and filling in a<br />
chart<br />
Whole class: teacher to<br />
students (T→SS)<br />
1. Individuals<br />
2.Pairwork: student to student<br />
(S ↔ S)<br />
In our lesson plans we usually use short forms for showing interaction patterns,<br />
for example T -→ Ss' ra<strong>the</strong>r than writing out 'teacher to students'. We use 'S' to<br />
mean one student, and 'Ss' to mean more than one student.<br />
The second way in which <strong>the</strong> teacher groups students is when she decides<br />
which students will work toge<strong>the</strong>r in pairs, groups or teams. The teacher<br />
considers <strong>the</strong> students' levels, <strong>learning</strong> styles, learner needs, personalities and<br />
relationships with o<strong>the</strong>rs in <strong>the</strong> class before asking students to work toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
She needs to think which students will work toge<strong>the</strong>r best in order to learn best.<br />
<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
When deciding how to group students, we need to consider a number <strong>of</strong><br />
different factors:<br />
• The <strong>teaching</strong> aim. It is much easier to choose how to group students when<br />
we have decided on <strong>the</strong> aim <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> aim <strong>of</strong> each activity.<br />
• The <strong>learning</strong> styles <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> students. For example, some students prefer to<br />
work as individuals, o<strong>the</strong>rs in groups. Students also have different<br />
personalities and find it easier to work with some partners or groups than<br />
with o<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />
• The ability and level <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> students. Most classes are 'mixed ability'/ i-e.<br />
<strong>the</strong>y include students <strong>of</strong> different abilities. We can group students for some<br />
activities so that students <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> same ability work toge<strong>the</strong>r, and for o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
activities so that students <strong>of</strong> different abilities work toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
• The personalities <strong>of</strong> our students. Most <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> time students will work well<br />
toge<strong>the</strong>r, but sometimes <strong>the</strong>re are students who do not work toge<strong>the</strong>r<br />
positively, e.g. when one student is shy and ano<strong>the</strong>r is quite dominant (i.e.<br />
always talking and stopping o<strong>the</strong>rs from taking part). We need to think<br />
carefully about how to group <strong>the</strong>se students.<br />
• The class size. With a class <strong>of</strong> between 20 and 30 students, we can manage<br />
pair and group work quite easily. With classes <strong>of</strong> more than 30 students, pair<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 104
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
and group work are possible, but need more careful <strong>planning</strong>.<br />
• The previous experience <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> students. When students are not used to pair<br />
and group work we need to plan how to introduce this way <strong>of</strong> working. We<br />
can start by doing short pairwork activities and gradually introduce longer<br />
and more varied groupings.<br />
• The activities that we have chosen. For example, a discussion activity can<br />
be done in groups, a role-play can be done in pairs. But we can also<br />
choose to do <strong>the</strong>se activities differently, depending on <strong>the</strong> needs <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
group and <strong>the</strong> aims <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson. So, for example, a discussion activity can<br />
be done in pairs or as a whole class, and a role-play can be done in groups.<br />
• The balance <strong>of</strong> interaction patterns in a lesson. A lesson where learners are<br />
doing pairwork for <strong>the</strong> whole lesson will probably not be successful: learners<br />
will become bored and <strong>the</strong>re might be discipline problems. A lesson where<br />
learners are doing individual work for <strong>the</strong> whole lesson will probably not be<br />
successful ei<strong>the</strong>r: learners will lose concentration and become bored.<br />
Equally, a lesson which is wholly teacher-led is unlikely to be successful:<br />
learners need a balance <strong>of</strong> different interaction patterns within one lesson.<br />
• The group dynamics <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class, i.e. <strong>the</strong> relationships between <strong>the</strong><br />
students and how students will behave towards each o<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
The first part <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan from a methodology book for primary learners is<br />
below. In each activity learners are grouped in different ways: <strong>the</strong>y work as a<br />
whole class, in groups and individually.<br />
Time Teacher's activity Pupils' activity<br />
5-10<br />
minutes<br />
10 minutes<br />
10 minutes<br />
1. Warmer: brief revision <strong>of</strong> colours, using a<br />
team game.<br />
2. Bring in a goldfish or a picture <strong>of</strong> a fish to<br />
introduce <strong>the</strong> topic to pupils. Discuss <strong>the</strong><br />
fish -what it looks like, its colour, its parts.<br />
Check who has a fish at home.<br />
3. Tell pupils you are going to tell <strong>the</strong>m a<br />
story. In groups pupils predict what <strong>the</strong> story<br />
will be. Get feedback from <strong>the</strong> groups.<br />
4. Explain <strong>the</strong> activity, i.e. pupils have to<br />
colour <strong>the</strong>ir fish as <strong>the</strong> story requests. Give<br />
out colours and photocopies <strong>of</strong> a fish<br />
drawing.<br />
5. Tell <strong>the</strong> first part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story with actions<br />
and pictures, continue <strong>the</strong> story with<br />
instructions for colouring.<br />
Pupils stand in lines behind flags<br />
.<strong>of</strong> different colours. The teacher<br />
says a colour. Pupils behind <strong>the</strong><br />
flag <strong>of</strong> that colour put up <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
hands.<br />
Pupils ga<strong>the</strong>r round <strong>the</strong> tank and<br />
say what <strong>the</strong>y know about fish.<br />
They tell each o<strong>the</strong>r something<br />
about <strong>the</strong>ir own fish. Pupils talk<br />
toge<strong>the</strong>r to try and guess what will<br />
be in <strong>the</strong> story.<br />
Group monitors give out crayons<br />
and blank sheets.<br />
Pupils colour in <strong>the</strong> fish drawings<br />
following instructions.<br />
The interaction patterns in <strong>the</strong> lesson are:<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 105
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
1 Activity 1: two large groups/teams<br />
2 Activities 2, 3 and 4: whole class and groups. In Activities 2 and 3 <strong>the</strong><br />
teacher is working with <strong>the</strong> whole class. The teacher <strong>the</strong>n divides <strong>the</strong><br />
pupils into groups for <strong>the</strong> prediction activity.<br />
3 Activity 5: individual work. In this activity <strong>the</strong> teacher is telling <strong>the</strong> story<br />
and <strong>the</strong> pupils are working on <strong>the</strong>ir own, listening and colouring.<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />
Here is <strong>the</strong> second part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> same lesson. For each activity, identify <strong>the</strong><br />
interaction patterns and <strong>the</strong>ir purpose for <strong>the</strong> stage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />
Time Teacher's activity Pupils' activity<br />
5 minutes<br />
5 minutes<br />
5 minutes<br />
6. Get <strong>the</strong> pupils to compare drawings.<br />
7. Class feedback. Elicit from different learners<br />
<strong>the</strong> colours <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> little fish. Use sentence<br />
prompts, e.g. His face is...<br />
8. Ask pupils what <strong>the</strong>y thought about <strong>the</strong> story,<br />
in L1 if necessary. Ask whe<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> big fish was<br />
right not to give <strong>the</strong> little fish colour for his lips.<br />
Pupils compare drawings in<br />
pairs.<br />
Pupils talk about <strong>the</strong> colours <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> fish to <strong>the</strong> whole class, e.g.<br />
His face is...<br />
Pupils give <strong>the</strong>ir opinions to <strong>the</strong><br />
class.<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Which <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following statements do you agree with and why?<br />
1. I try to have a balance <strong>of</strong> different interaction patterns in a lesson.<br />
2. It's best to separate weak/strong or shy/dominant learners into different<br />
groups or pairs.<br />
3. The age <strong>of</strong> learners that I teach makes some interaction patterns difficult.<br />
4. My learners don't like group work, so I don't do it.<br />
5. When learners work in pairs or groups, <strong>the</strong>y have more opportunities to<br />
speak than when <strong>the</strong>y work alone.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1 -6, match <strong>the</strong> different activities with <strong>the</strong> most suitable<br />
interaction patterns listed A, B or C.<br />
Interaction patterns<br />
A. pair or group work<br />
B. individual work<br />
C. whole-class work<br />
Activities<br />
6 Learners do an information-gap-activity with two sets <strong>of</strong> information.<br />
7 Learners write <strong>the</strong>ir own stories.<br />
8 Learners decide toge<strong>the</strong>r how to report <strong>the</strong>ir conclusions to <strong>the</strong> rest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
class.<br />
9 All <strong>the</strong> learners act out a play for <strong>the</strong> parents.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 106
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
10 Learners do a written test.<br />
11 Learners take part in a choral drill.<br />
Correcting learners<br />
<br />
How do we correct learners?<br />
When we correct learners we show <strong>the</strong>m that something is wrong and that <strong>the</strong>y have<br />
made a mistake. We may also show <strong>the</strong>m how to put <strong>the</strong>ir mistake right. When learners<br />
make mistakes in speaking or writing, we correct <strong>the</strong>se mistakes in different ways. We<br />
use oral correction techniques to correct oral mistakes and written correction<br />
techniques to correct written mistakes. We also use different techniques when we<br />
correct different kinds <strong>of</strong> mistakes, i.e. errors or slips.<br />
Key concepts<br />
What ways can you think <strong>of</strong> for correcting learners' oral and written mistakes?<br />
Oral correction<br />
Here are some ways that we can correct oral mistakes:<br />
1. Drawing a time line on <strong>the</strong> board. Time lines show learners <strong>the</strong> relationship<br />
between <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> a verb tense and time. This technique is particularly useful<br />
for mistakes such as 'I have seen that film two weeks ago'. The time line to<br />
show this mistake might look like this.<br />
Past Now Future<br />
x = two weeks ago<br />
x<br />
This shows learners that, because <strong>the</strong> event is in <strong>the</strong> past and <strong>the</strong> time is<br />
specified, <strong>the</strong>y cannot use <strong>the</strong> present perfect. The correct sentence is 'I saw<br />
that film two weeks ago'.<br />
2. Finger correction. This shows learners where <strong>the</strong>y have made a mistake.<br />
We show one hand to <strong>the</strong> class and point to each finger in turn as we say<br />
each word in <strong>the</strong> sentence. One finger is usually used for each word.<br />
This technique is particularly useful when learners have left out a word or<br />
when we want <strong>the</strong>m to use a contraction, for example I'm working ra<strong>the</strong>r<br />
than I am working. We bring two fingers toge<strong>the</strong>r to show that we want<br />
<strong>the</strong>m to bring <strong>the</strong> two words toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
3. Gestures and/or facial expressions are useful when we do not want to<br />
interrupt learners too much, but still want to show <strong>the</strong>m that <strong>the</strong>y have<br />
made a slip. A worried look from <strong>the</strong> teacher can indicate to learners that<br />
<strong>the</strong>re is a problem. It is possible to use many different gestures qr facial<br />
expressions. The ones you use will depend on what is appropriate for<br />
your culture and your <strong>teaching</strong> situation.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 107
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
4. Phonemic symbols. Pointing to phonemic symbols is helpful when<br />
learners make pronunciation mistakes, for example using a long vowel<br />
/u:/when <strong>the</strong>y should have used a short one /u/, or when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
mispronounce a consonant. You can only use this technique with<br />
learners who are familiar with <strong>the</strong> relevant phonemic symbols.<br />
5. Echo correcting means repeating. Repeating what a learner says with<br />
rising intonation will show <strong>the</strong> learner that <strong>the</strong>re is a mistake somewhere.<br />
You will find this technique works well when learners have made small<br />
slips which you feel confident <strong>the</strong>y can correct <strong>the</strong>mselves.<br />
6. Identifying <strong>the</strong> mistake. Sometimes we need to identify <strong>the</strong> mistake by<br />
focusing learners' attention on it and telling <strong>the</strong>m that <strong>the</strong>re is a problem.<br />
This is a useful technique for correcting errors. We might say things like<br />
'You can't say it like that' or 'Are you sure?' to indicate that <strong>the</strong>y have<br />
made a mistake.<br />
7. Not correcting at <strong>the</strong> time when <strong>the</strong> mistake is made. We can use this<br />
technique to give feedback after a fluency activity, for example. It is<br />
better not to correct learners when <strong>the</strong>y are doing fluency activities, but<br />
we can make notes <strong>of</strong> serious mistakes <strong>the</strong>y make. At <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
activity, we can say <strong>the</strong> mistakes or write <strong>the</strong>m on <strong>the</strong> board and ask<br />
learners what <strong>the</strong> problems are.<br />
8. Peer and self-correction. Peer correction is when learners correct each<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r's mistakes. Self-correction is when learners correct <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />
mistakes. Sometimes we need to indicate that <strong>the</strong>re is a mistake for <strong>the</strong><br />
learners to correct it. Sometimes <strong>the</strong>y notice <strong>the</strong> mistake <strong>the</strong>mselves and<br />
quickly correct it. Peer and self-correction help learners to become<br />
independent <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher and more aware <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir own <strong>learning</strong> needs.<br />
9. Ignoring mistakes. In fluency activities we <strong>of</strong>ten ignore all <strong>the</strong> mistakes<br />
while <strong>the</strong> activity is in progress, as <strong>the</strong> important thing is for us to be able<br />
to understand <strong>the</strong> learners' ideas and for <strong>the</strong> learners to get fluency<br />
practice. We can make a note <strong>of</strong> frequent mistakes and correct <strong>the</strong>m with<br />
<strong>the</strong> whole class after <strong>the</strong> activity. We <strong>of</strong>ten also ignore mistakes which<br />
are above <strong>the</strong> learners' current level. For example, an elementary learner<br />
telling us about what he did at <strong>the</strong> weekend might make a guess at how<br />
to talk about past time in English. We would not correct his mistakes<br />
because <strong>the</strong> past simple is a structure we have not yet taught him. We<br />
may also ignore mistakes made by a particular learner because we think<br />
this is best for that learner, e.g. a weak or shy learner. Finally, we <strong>of</strong>ten<br />
also ignore slips as learners can usually correct <strong>the</strong>se <strong>the</strong>mselves.<br />
Written correction<br />
In next unit we will see how we can use a correction code to show learners<br />
where some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir mistakes are and what kind <strong>the</strong>y are. O<strong>the</strong>r techniques for<br />
making written corrections are:<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 108
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
1. Teacher correction. The teacher corrects <strong>the</strong> learners' mistakes by<br />
writing <strong>the</strong> correct word(s), instead <strong>of</strong> symbols from a correction code.<br />
2. Peer correction. The learners look at each o<strong>the</strong>r's work and correct it or<br />
discuss possible corrections.<br />
3. Self-correction. The learners, usually with <strong>the</strong> help <strong>of</strong> a guidance sheet,<br />
look for and correct mistakes in <strong>the</strong>ir own work.<br />
4. Ignoring <strong>the</strong> mistake. As in point 9 above, sometimes we choose to<br />
ignore mistakes that learners make.<br />
<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
• In <strong>the</strong> classroom, we use a mix <strong>of</strong> teacher correction, peer correction and<br />
self-correction. Sometimes we need to correct learners. Sometimes we<br />
indicate to <strong>the</strong>m that <strong>the</strong>re is a mistake and <strong>the</strong>y are able to correct<br />
<strong>the</strong>mselves or o<strong>the</strong>r learners can help <strong>the</strong>m. Sometimes we ignore learners'<br />
mistakes. We choose what is appropriate for <strong>the</strong> <strong>learning</strong> purpose, <strong>the</strong><br />
learner and <strong>the</strong> situation.<br />
• The technique we use for correcting mistakes depends on <strong>the</strong> type <strong>of</strong><br />
mistake <strong>the</strong> learner has made. For example, we can use echo correction for<br />
slips, and time lines for errors.<br />
• We do not correct every mistake our learners make. We correct mistakes<br />
according to <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> activity, <strong>the</strong> stage in <strong>the</strong> lesson, <strong>the</strong><br />
seriousness <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> mistake and <strong>the</strong> learner's needs. It is inappropriate to<br />
correct all <strong>the</strong> mistakes learners make, and it can make learners lose<br />
motivation. When learners are doing a fluency activity, correction after <strong>the</strong><br />
activity would be more appropriate.<br />
• Some correction techniques are more suitable for certain types <strong>of</strong> mistake.<br />
For example, finger correction is useful for pronunciation mistakes and time<br />
lines are useful for mistakes with tenses.<br />
• Techniques such as gestures and facial expressions give opportunities for<br />
peer and self-correction. This is because we show <strong>the</strong> learners that <strong>the</strong>re is<br />
a mistake but we do not correct it.<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />
Look at <strong>the</strong> following pairs <strong>of</strong> sentences. Learners <strong>of</strong>ten make mistakes and<br />
confuse <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> A and B in each pair. Draw two time lines for each pair<br />
which dearly show <strong>the</strong> differences in meaning.<br />
1 A Cinderella danced with <strong>the</strong> prince when <strong>the</strong> dock struck midnight.<br />
B Cinderella was dancing with <strong>the</strong> prince when <strong>the</strong> clock struck midnight.<br />
2 A I play tennis on Fridays.<br />
B I played tennis on Friday.<br />
REFECTION<br />
Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />
1 When learners make mistakes it means that <strong>the</strong>y are not <strong>learning</strong>.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 109
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
2 It is better to correct all <strong>the</strong> mistakes learners make.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-6, match <strong>the</strong> teacher’s behaviour with <strong>the</strong> correction techniques<br />
listed A-B<br />
You need to use some options more than once.<br />
Teacher’s behariour<br />
Correction techniques<br />
A. Ignore <strong>the</strong> mistake<br />
B. Use self-correction<br />
C. Draw a time line on <strong>the</strong> board<br />
D. Use finger correction.<br />
1. You have used a correction code to show learners where <strong>the</strong>y have<br />
made mistakes in <strong>the</strong>ir writing. You now ask <strong>the</strong>m to correct <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />
mistakes. You now ask <strong>the</strong>m to correct <strong>the</strong>ir own mistakes.<br />
2. You are working with a class <strong>of</strong> elementary ten-year-olds who are doing<br />
a fluency activity. One <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners is talking with a class about her<br />
pet. She says: ‘My rabbit eat lettuce. ‘You let her continue talking.<br />
3. You are doing a controlled practice activity. One <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners says: ‘I<br />
have been working last week. ‘You show her a diagram.<br />
4. A learner is repeating <strong>the</strong> instructions for a activity and says: Then we<br />
choose/tri./(three) objects.’ You just listen.<br />
5. You are focusing on spoken <strong>language</strong> and <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> contractions. A<br />
learner says: ‘I am going swimming tomorrow, ‘You want to show her<br />
where <strong>the</strong> mistake is. You use your hand.<br />
6. An advanced learner asks you: ‘Can you borrow me a pencil, please?’<br />
You ask him to him to think about what he has said and to try again.<br />
Giving feedback<br />
<br />
How do we give feedback?<br />
Giving feedback is giving information to learners about <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>learning</strong>. Feedback<br />
can focus on learners' <strong>language</strong> or skills, <strong>the</strong> ideas in <strong>the</strong>ir work, <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
behaviour, <strong>the</strong>ir attitude to <strong>learning</strong> or <strong>the</strong>ir progress. Sometimes we give<br />
feedback to <strong>the</strong> whole class, at o<strong>the</strong>r times we give feedback to small groups or<br />
individual learners. The purposes <strong>of</strong> feedback are to motivate learners and to<br />
help <strong>the</strong>m understand what <strong>the</strong>ir problems are and how <strong>the</strong>y can improve.<br />
<br />
Key concepts<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 110
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Think <strong>of</strong> three comments you <strong>of</strong>ten give to your learners as feedback. What do<br />
<strong>the</strong>y focus on? Why do you give <strong>the</strong>m?<br />
Here are some examples <strong>of</strong> teacher feedback to learners.<br />
Example Focus Purpose<br />
Oral: 'Well done. This is much better.'<br />
Oral: 'Have ano<strong>the</strong>r look at number<br />
four. There's a problem with spelling<br />
and I think <strong>the</strong>re are more than two<br />
people.'<br />
Oral: 'Let's look at <strong>the</strong> new structure on<br />
<strong>the</strong> board again. I think some <strong>of</strong> you<br />
have misunderstood how we use it.'<br />
Written: 'What an amazing story! You've<br />
used adjectives very well this time. Your<br />
work is much better this time. You have<br />
tried very hard.'<br />
Oral: 'You've made good progress in all<br />
your work this month. Your written work<br />
is much more accurate.'<br />
Written: 'B / 70%. Have a look at<br />
grammar section 5 at <strong>the</strong> back <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
coursebook and check again <strong>the</strong><br />
difference in meaning between <strong>the</strong> past<br />
simple and <strong>the</strong> past perfect.'<br />
Oral: 'You all did <strong>the</strong> pairwork activity<br />
quite well but 1 heard too much<br />
Spanish and not enough English.'<br />
Progress,<br />
<strong>language</strong> and<br />
ideas<br />
Language and<br />
ideas<br />
Language<br />
Ideas,<br />
<strong>language</strong>,<br />
attitude and<br />
progress<br />
Language and<br />
progress<br />
Language<br />
Language,<br />
ideas and<br />
behaviour<br />
Praising <strong>the</strong> learner and telling her<br />
she is doing well; encouragement.<br />
Telling <strong>the</strong> learner <strong>the</strong>re is a<br />
problem with one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> answers<br />
and that she needs to look at it<br />
again.<br />
Inviting learners to look again at<br />
<strong>language</strong> that <strong>the</strong>y are having<br />
problems with.<br />
Praising <strong>the</strong> learner on her good<br />
level <strong>of</strong> work, and <strong>the</strong> effort she has<br />
made and in particular on one part<br />
<strong>of</strong> her writing (adjectives).<br />
Informing <strong>the</strong> learner <strong>of</strong> her<br />
progress; encouragement.<br />
Giving a grade and informing <strong>the</strong><br />
learner <strong>of</strong> what <strong>the</strong> problem was<br />
with her work and telling her exactly<br />
what she needs to review and how.<br />
Encouraging learners but also<br />
informing <strong>the</strong>m that <strong>the</strong>y did not<br />
behave appropriately during<br />
pairwork.<br />
We can give feedback to individual learners (individual feedback) or groups <strong>of</strong><br />
learners (group feedback). When learners give feedback to one ano<strong>the</strong>r, this is<br />
called peer feedback. Feedback can be oral or written.<br />
Feedback can be linked to formal or informal assessment and can be given to<br />
learners in <strong>the</strong> classroom or during individual meetings. We can also write<br />
regular feedback in <strong>the</strong> form <strong>of</strong> comments, grades or marks on a learner's<br />
record sheet. The learner can keep this sheet in <strong>the</strong>ir portfolio or we might keep<br />
it with our records <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir overall progress and achievement. We can use this<br />
feedback when we make our end-<strong>of</strong>-course assessment.<br />
Peer feedback is useful for all learners. The learners who give <strong>the</strong> feedback<br />
reflect on <strong>the</strong> work <strong>the</strong>ir classmates have done. The learners who receive<br />
feedback are given information on how <strong>the</strong>y can improve. The learners are<br />
<strong>of</strong>ten guided by a feedback observation sheet. Young learners, though, are not<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 111
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
able to give very detailed peer feedback because <strong>the</strong>y are not yet able to think<br />
about <strong>the</strong>ir classmates' work very carefully. Peer feedback can have a positive<br />
effect on classroom dynamics and can help to train learners in skills <strong>the</strong>y need<br />
to become autonomous.<br />
Learners can also give teachers feedback about <strong>the</strong> lessons, activities and<br />
materials. They can tell us when <strong>the</strong>y like what <strong>the</strong>y are doing and when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
are not so interested in <strong>the</strong> materials or activities, or when <strong>the</strong>y are having<br />
problems with <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong>. They can also make suggestions for materials and<br />
activities to use.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />
Feedback should be positive. We should tell learners what is good, what<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are doing well, what <strong>the</strong>y need to do to improve and how. This is<br />
particularly important for weaker or less confident learners.<br />
We can give feedback in <strong>the</strong> classroom during an activity, while we are<br />
monitoring learners doing pairwork or group work or at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> or after<br />
<strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />
During feedback we can revisit or recycle <strong>language</strong> that learners are having<br />
problems with.<br />
Learners will need training in how to give feedback to each o<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
We can organise small-group feedback sessions, where <strong>the</strong> teacher and <strong>the</strong><br />
learners can give and receive feedback on <strong>the</strong> classes and on <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>learning</strong>.<br />
Feedback which is particularly personal or sensitive should be given to<br />
learners in individual meetings and not in front <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> whole class.<br />
It is useful to give learners written or oral feedback after assessment in<br />
addition to giving <strong>the</strong>m a score - to provide encouragement and guidance for<br />
how to improve.<br />
FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />
Here are some examples <strong>of</strong> feedback. For each one identify its focus and<br />
purpose.<br />
Feedback Focus Purpose.<br />
1. You have sat nicely for <strong>the</strong> whole lesson.<br />
Well done!<br />
2. I´m not sure that´s right. Can anyone help?<br />
3. That was very thoughtful <strong>of</strong> you to help <strong>the</strong> order<br />
group.<br />
4. This is great, but not all your work has been so<br />
good this month. Some <strong>of</strong> it was ra<strong>the</strong>r careless.<br />
REFLECTION<br />
Do you agree which <strong>the</strong>se teachers´ comments giving feedback? Why? Why<br />
not?<br />
1. My learners are only interested in <strong>the</strong> marks <strong>the</strong>y get for <strong>the</strong>ir work. They<br />
are not interested in my comments. They don´t even read <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 112
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
2. My group <strong>of</strong> adult learns are always asking me for feedback on <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
levels and want to know how <strong>the</strong>y doing in every lesson. I think it´s very<br />
difficult for <strong>the</strong> learners who are making slower progress. They don´t like<br />
it when I tell <strong>the</strong>m <strong>the</strong>y are doing as well as <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />
3. When I get my learners to give feedback to each o<strong>the</strong>r, <strong>the</strong>y just say<br />
´That´s fine’ and don´t say any more.<br />
PRACTICE TASK<br />
For questions 1-5, match <strong>the</strong> situations with <strong>the</strong> kinds <strong>of</strong> feedback listed A-C.<br />
1. The teacher notices that all <strong>the</strong> learners are having problems with <strong>the</strong><br />
new <strong>language</strong>. She notes <strong>the</strong> problem down and discusses it later with<br />
<strong>the</strong> learners.<br />
A. Peer feedback<br />
B. Teacher feedback to <strong>the</strong> class<br />
C. Teacher feedback to an individual<br />
2. A young learner has just finished talking to <strong>the</strong> class about his hobby.<br />
The teacher says: ‘Thank you very much. That was very interesting.’<br />
A. Feedback on <strong>language</strong><br />
B. Feedback on attitude<br />
C. Feedback on ideas.<br />
3. A teenage learner has written a story for homework. The teacher has<br />
written: This is so much better than last week’s homework. Well done.’<br />
A. Specific instructions on what to do<br />
B. Identifying problems<br />
C. Encouragement<br />
4. The teacher writes on <strong>the</strong> first draft <strong>of</strong> a learner’s composition: ‘Look at<br />
this website for more ideas.’<br />
A. Feedback on grammatical mistakes<br />
B. Instructions on <strong>planning</strong>.<br />
C. Help with using reference resources.<br />
5. The teacher is talking to a group <strong>of</strong> primary –school children at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong><br />
a group work activity. She says: ‘You talked a lot today and I was<br />
pleased to see everyone working so well toge<strong>the</strong>r.’<br />
A. Feedback on pronunciation<br />
B. Feedback on behavior<br />
C. Feedback on progress<br />
FLANNEL BOARD MAGNET BOARD AND ADHESIVE PLASTIC<br />
Ah three media enable pictures or texts on paper or card to be displayed to <strong>the</strong><br />
class.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 113
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Flannel board: cutout figures (pictures or words) are backed by flannel, rough<br />
sandpaper or teazlestrip (e.g. Velero) and are placed un a vertical hoard<br />
covered with flannel or blank - et - like material.<br />
Magnet board cutout figures have a small piece <strong>of</strong> strip magnet stuck on <strong>the</strong><br />
back or placed on <strong>the</strong> front. The surface <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> board is zinc nr tinplate metal<br />
sheet. The figures adhere much better than on <strong>the</strong> flannelboard. On <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
hand, <strong>the</strong> magnetboard is more inconvenient because it is much heavier and<br />
<strong>the</strong> magnets can be difficult to acquire and to keep.<br />
Adhesive plastic: a plastic is widely available which can he torn into small<br />
pieces and moulded with <strong>the</strong> fingers into small balls. It can <strong>the</strong>n be used to stick<br />
paper or card onto most smooth surfaces. In many ways this is <strong>the</strong> most useful<br />
<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> three media if it is available to <strong>the</strong> teacher. One well - known versión is<br />
called Blu - Tack.<br />
Characteristics and techniques<br />
All three media:<br />
1. All three media are essentially for use by <strong>the</strong> teacher and material<br />
displayed should be big enough for <strong>the</strong> whole class to see.<br />
2. Sentences and scenes can 'grow' or diminish in front <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class as words<br />
or pictures are added, moved or taken away.<br />
3. The words and pictures can be handled by <strong>the</strong> teacher or students before<br />
being placed on <strong>the</strong> board or surface.<br />
4. On <strong>the</strong> magnatboard, background settings (for example, a street) can he<br />
drawn on large pieces <strong>of</strong> paper and placed on <strong>the</strong> board. Pictures can be<br />
placed on top <strong>of</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r pictures.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 114
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
5. With adhesive plastic no preparation is required and any piece <strong>of</strong> paper or<br />
card can be stuck or moved from one position to ano<strong>the</strong>r. Pictures can be<br />
placed on top <strong>of</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r pictures including large pieces <strong>of</strong> paper<br />
representing settings.<br />
6. Essentially all three media allow <strong>the</strong> teacher and .students to simulate in a<br />
very simple form and with great flexibility, scenes, situations and stores as<br />
well as diagrams and short texts. Thus a great variety <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> can he<br />
contextualized through <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se media.<br />
7. Teachers nervous <strong>of</strong> drawing on <strong>the</strong> chalkboard can prepare visuals in<br />
advance with <strong>the</strong>se three media.<br />
Presentation and controlled practice<br />
Characteristics and techniques: showing one or more pictures illustrating objects or<br />
actions.<br />
At <strong>the</strong> most basic level, pictures can he used to introduce <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />
new to <strong>the</strong> students or to cue answers to questions or substitutions within sentences.<br />
Presenting vocabulary<br />
TEACHER: This is a cat. It's on <strong>the</strong> table!. Now it's under <strong>the</strong> table!, etc.<br />
Vocabulary practice<br />
The teacher puts a large piece <strong>of</strong> paper on <strong>the</strong> hoard (magnet board only) with <strong>the</strong><br />
outline <strong>of</strong> an elephant drawn on it. He or she <strong>the</strong>n places food inside <strong>the</strong> elephant.<br />
Students take it in turns to name <strong>the</strong> food and <strong>the</strong>n lo list ah <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r food <strong>the</strong> elephant<br />
has eaten.<br />
TEACHER:<br />
STUDENT:<br />
TEACHER:<br />
STUDENT:<br />
What's this?<br />
It's an apple.<br />
So, what has <strong>the</strong> elephant eaten?<br />
The elephant has eaten a piece <strong>of</strong> cake, a cabbage, some sugar and an<br />
apple. etc.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 115
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Open communicative practice<br />
Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> flexibility <strong>of</strong> being to give students pictures to hold<br />
which <strong>the</strong>y can <strong>the</strong>n come to <strong>the</strong> front <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class and stick on <strong>the</strong> board.<br />
The students can be divided into pairs or groups. Each student can be given one<br />
picture and/or word and students take it in turns to place <strong>the</strong>ir pictures on <strong>the</strong> board.<br />
They must he able to say what connection (heir picture has with <strong>the</strong> last picture or word<br />
placed <strong>the</strong>re. If <strong>the</strong> class like (he idea, <strong>the</strong> picture can be left on <strong>the</strong> hoard.<br />
The activity can be done by having only two pictures which have to be related or by<br />
telling a story with each successive picture illustrating <strong>the</strong> next part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story.<br />
In this example, <strong>the</strong> two pictures have been related:<br />
STUDENT: The ghost has lived in this house for three hundred years.<br />
Listening comprehension and oral retelling<br />
Characteristics and techniques: building up a situation, moving pictures to illustrate a<br />
story.<br />
These three media lend <strong>the</strong>mselves to <strong>the</strong> established audio visual approach <strong>of</strong> using<br />
pictures Lo illustrate a story or a dialogue. The understanding <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story helps <strong>the</strong><br />
student to understand <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> new to <strong>the</strong>m. The students having<br />
heard and understood <strong>the</strong> story <strong>the</strong>n retell it, act out <strong>the</strong> dialogue and change <strong>the</strong><br />
[Escribir texto] Página 116
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
pictures as required.<br />
Owing to shortage <strong>of</strong> space in this book, only three .scenes <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story are illustrate<br />
below. However, in <strong>the</strong> classroom <strong>the</strong> number <strong>of</strong> intermediary stages is limited only by<br />
<strong>the</strong> number <strong>of</strong> pictures <strong>the</strong> teacher can get hold <strong>of</strong>.<br />
When Ron was a twenty he used to be so nice and so happy. He used to play with his<br />
teddy bear. And everybody used lo like him.........<br />
etc.<br />
When Ron was twenty he was a student. He was poor but he was happy. He used to<br />
live in a little room and in he winter he used to wear his coat in his room because he<br />
hadn't got enough money for a heater. He didn't play with his teddy hear anymore but<br />
he used to keep it with him for luck! etc.<br />
(Note: <strong>the</strong> picture <strong>of</strong> Ron al, twenty can be stuck on top <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> picture <strong>of</strong> Ron as a<br />
baby.)<br />
Now he is fifty. He has a car and a big house but he is a miserable man. He is always<br />
complaining. No one likes him.<br />
The first few developments in a story are illustrated here. The picture grows and<br />
changes according to <strong>the</strong> stage in <strong>the</strong> story.<br />
Technical tips<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 117
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Magnetboard<br />
1. Magnetboards can be made easily and cheaply. Hardware shops sell <strong>the</strong> metal<br />
plate. Check that magnets stick to it. The metal should be about 1 m by 1.5 m<br />
depending on how you can cope with <strong>the</strong> weight. The metal should be<br />
mounted on a wooden frame or against wooden board. The alternative is to<br />
use a metal cupboard if <strong>the</strong>re is one convenient. (As mentioned before, some<br />
whiteboards are already magnetised.)<br />
2. Magnetic strip can be obtained from refrigerator repairers; it is used as <strong>the</strong> seal<br />
on refrigerator doors. Hardware shops or stationers sometimes sell magnetic<br />
strips or small, flat magnets.<br />
Flannelboard<br />
1. Flannel or blanket-like material should be stretched no a board. Because <strong>the</strong><br />
figures do not adhere as well as on a magnetboard it is an advantage lo<br />
position <strong>the</strong> board so that it is leaning ra<strong>the</strong>r than vertical.<br />
2. The figures must have a rough surface on <strong>the</strong> back which adheres to <strong>the</strong> board.<br />
Sandpaper or flannel itself will work reasonably well. However, a commercial<br />
product like flock paper or teazel or Velcro is better.<br />
Adhesive plastic<br />
The surface should be free from dust. The chalkboard ought to be sponged clean and<br />
must be allowed to dry before <strong>the</strong> adhesive will stick. An alternative a rubber glue<br />
which peels <strong>of</strong>f when dry and does riot damage 11w surface or <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />
Notes for all three media<br />
1. Pictures can be cut from magazines. Very <strong>of</strong> ten it is more satisfactory to draw<br />
<strong>the</strong>m and to colour <strong>the</strong>m with fell tip pens.<br />
2. Some teachers do not attempt to have individual pictures for alt objects. They<br />
have a number <strong>of</strong> symmetrical shapes which <strong>the</strong>y introduce at <strong>the</strong> beginning <strong>of</strong><br />
each activity as symbols <strong>of</strong> particular objects. Here are examples <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> sort <strong>of</strong><br />
basic shapes which can he used to symbolize different things:<br />
The advantage <strong>of</strong> this approach is not only that it is time saving but that some students<br />
like <strong>the</strong> challenge to <strong>the</strong>ir imagination.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 118
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
3. In all cases it is it is advisable to mount <strong>the</strong> pictures on thin card and to cover<br />
<strong>the</strong>m with a clear; self adhesive plastic so that <strong>the</strong>y can be used many times.<br />
WALLPICTURES AND WALLPOSTERS<br />
Wallpictures and wallposters illustrate screen people or objects and are large enough<br />
to be seen by all <strong>the</strong>y students.<br />
1. Produced commercially for <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> purposes (see Byrne, Dand, Hall,<br />
D, 1976 Wall pictures for <strong>language</strong> practice Longman.)<br />
2. Produced for o<strong>the</strong>r educational purposes, for example, a mad safety poster, or<br />
for commercial purpose unconnected with education, for example, a publicity<br />
poster.<br />
3. Produced for <strong>the</strong> teacher and or student, ei<strong>the</strong>r drawn or made by collage (see<br />
page 116).<br />
Characteristics and Techniques<br />
1. Wallpictures <strong>of</strong>ten show a complicated scene and contain many details. If <strong>the</strong><br />
students cannot see ant <strong>the</strong> necessary detail or if <strong>the</strong>y are distracted by <strong>the</strong><br />
rest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> pictures <strong>the</strong>n that is clearly a disadvantage. On <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r hand, it is<br />
<strong>the</strong> very complexity <strong>of</strong> most wallpictures which make some activities so useful.<br />
2. The whole class can see <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />
3. It is ready to use and can be use more than once.<br />
4. It can be left on display or taken down.<br />
Presentation and guided practice<br />
Characteristics and techniques: a wallpictures like <strong>the</strong> one illustrated above provides a<br />
context for <strong>language</strong> use and a variety <strong>of</strong> reference for controller! practice in both<br />
speaking and writing.<br />
Wallpictures have a traditional role in <strong>the</strong> presenting <strong>of</strong> new <strong>language</strong>, both vocabulary<br />
and structures, to <strong>the</strong> students. In <strong>the</strong> hand draw pictures illustrate above, <strong>the</strong> teacher<br />
can introduce many words for people and objects seen in a Street. The scene as a<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 119
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
whole gives a contexts for this new <strong>language</strong> and an opportunity to move into<br />
controlled practice by <strong>the</strong> student.<br />
The present perfect tense<br />
Traditionally, <strong>the</strong> wallpictures is associated with <strong>the</strong> present continuous tense.<br />
However, o<strong>the</strong>r tense forms can be introduced and practiced, for example, <strong>the</strong> present<br />
perfect.<br />
TEACHER: (pointing at <strong>the</strong> man coming out <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> shop) This man is coming out <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
shop. He is got a bag. He's bought something. What has be bought, do you think?.<br />
And this woman, she's dropped something on <strong>the</strong> pavement. What has she dropped?<br />
Having introduced <strong>the</strong> present perfect, <strong>the</strong> teacher night write a sentence pattern table<br />
on <strong>the</strong> board and ask <strong>the</strong> students to <strong>of</strong>fer more example based on <strong>the</strong> picture. For<br />
example.<br />
STUDENT A: The cat has climbed <strong>the</strong> tree.<br />
STUDENT B: The plane has left <strong>the</strong> airport<br />
STUDENT C: <strong>the</strong> woman has crossed <strong>the</strong> road<br />
Might<br />
Scenes always imply that something has happened before <strong>the</strong> time and <strong>the</strong> pictures<br />
and that something id going to happen afterwards. The teacher can exploit this<br />
example.<br />
TEACHER: What night <strong>the</strong> women have done before her bag broker<br />
STUDENT: she might have put too many heavy things in it<br />
TEACHER: What might she do next?<br />
STUDENT: She might wrap <strong>the</strong> shopping in her scarf.<br />
True/False game<br />
Controlled practice does not always need to be an occasion when <strong>the</strong> students merely<br />
articulate <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong>. Activities can be introduced which make <strong>the</strong> student thing<br />
about meaning and want to communicate it. For example <strong>the</strong> well - known true/false<br />
game can be used. The teacher (or a student) makes a number <strong>of</strong> statements some <strong>of</strong><br />
which are true and some <strong>of</strong> which are false. If this is dome orally <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> students can<br />
correct <strong>the</strong> teacher when he or she makes a false statement. For example.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 120
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
TEACHER: The can is being chased by <strong>the</strong> dog<br />
STUDENTS: No! The dog is being chased by <strong>the</strong> cat.<br />
(In <strong>the</strong> pictures, <strong>the</strong> dog really is being chased by <strong>the</strong> cat!)<br />
If <strong>the</strong> true/false games is done in writing, <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> teacher might write a number <strong>of</strong><br />
sentences on <strong>the</strong> board and ask <strong>the</strong> student to copy <strong>the</strong> correct ones and to correct<br />
and <strong>the</strong>n copy <strong>the</strong> incorrect ones.<br />
Once this version <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> activity has been done, each student can write a number <strong>of</strong><br />
sentences making some true and some false. The student <strong>the</strong>n read out each o<strong>the</strong>rs<br />
sentences if <strong>the</strong>y are true.<br />
Memory game<br />
Ano<strong>the</strong>r well established game which can transform a mechanical exercise into real<br />
communication is <strong>the</strong> memory game. The teacher stands with his or her back to <strong>the</strong><br />
picture and tries to describe every think in it. The students correct <strong>the</strong> teacher<br />
whenever he or she makes a mistake, a source <strong>of</strong> great satisfaction to <strong>the</strong> students.<br />
Once <strong>the</strong> students have understood <strong>the</strong> games <strong>the</strong>y can try it out in pairs or groups for<br />
<strong>the</strong>mselves with one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>n (or possibly two) trying to describe <strong>the</strong> picture from<br />
memory.<br />
Hide and seek<br />
Prepositions can be practiced with <strong>the</strong> game <strong>of</strong> hide and seek. One student imagines<br />
that he or she is a mouse and is hiding somewhere in <strong>the</strong> picture. The o<strong>the</strong>r students<br />
try to find out where <strong>the</strong> mouse is hiding.<br />
STUDENT A: Are your in <strong>the</strong> old man's pocket<br />
STUDENT MOUSE:: No.<br />
STUDENT B: Are you behind <strong>the</strong> tree in <strong>the</strong> park<br />
STUDENT MOUSE: No.<br />
Etc,<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 121
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Older students might prefer to imagine that <strong>the</strong>y have hidden something in <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />
Guided Writing<br />
You can give students a text with some words or sentences missing. The students<br />
complete <strong>the</strong> text by referring to <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />
Dialogues<br />
Characteristics and <strong>the</strong> techniques; <strong>the</strong> quality and variety <strong>of</strong> Information related to a<br />
<strong>the</strong>me in both wallpictures on page 44 provides a, context for dialogue and role play.<br />
The dialogues can be controlled as in <strong>the</strong> fist example below or open as in second<br />
example.<br />
Controlled Dialogue<br />
Write a model dialogue on <strong>the</strong> board which one or two pairs <strong>of</strong> students act out in front<br />
<strong>of</strong> class. When you feel that all <strong>the</strong> students understand <strong>the</strong> dialogue, ask <strong>the</strong>m to work<br />
with a neighbor and to device a new dialogue substituting o<strong>the</strong>r words for those which<br />
are underlined, based on <strong>the</strong> picture. Your dialogue might be like this,<br />
SMALL BOY: Where are we going now, Mummy?<br />
MOTHER: We are going to <strong>the</strong> baker's.<br />
Students might change <strong>the</strong> dialogue to: *<br />
CAT: Where are we going now, Fred?<br />
DOG: We are going to <strong>the</strong> park,<br />
Open Dialogue<br />
In this example, students have studied <strong>the</strong> wallpicture <strong>of</strong> animals on page 44 an have<br />
invented and written a dialogue which <strong>the</strong>y can <strong>the</strong>n act out for <strong>the</strong> class or direct<br />
ano<strong>the</strong>r pair to act for <strong>the</strong>m. The students have used <strong>the</strong> pictures <strong>of</strong> animals on <strong>the</strong><br />
poster as a reference ra<strong>the</strong>r than as a setting for <strong>the</strong>ir dialogue.<br />
ANIMAL RIGHTS WOMAN::<br />
HUNTER:<br />
ANIMAL RIGHTS WOMAN::<br />
HUNTER:<br />
ANIMAL RIGHTS WOMAN::<br />
You shouldn't kill birds<br />
Why not?<br />
Because it is wrong<br />
But <strong>the</strong> birds eat <strong>the</strong> corn<br />
These birds don't eat corn, <strong>the</strong>y<br />
eat insect.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 122
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Vocabulary<br />
Characteristics and Techniques: The pictures can be displayed quickly and is<br />
complexity can provide a rich source <strong>of</strong> vocabulary practice.<br />
The students call out in, say, five minutes ail <strong>the</strong> words <strong>the</strong>y remember which can be<br />
related to <strong>the</strong> pictures. More advanced students can be restricted to certain kinds <strong>of</strong>,<br />
words, for example adjectives. One our two students "secretaries" write down all <strong>the</strong><br />
words given by <strong>the</strong> class on <strong>the</strong> board.<br />
As <strong>the</strong> students call out <strong>the</strong> words you should make a rapid note <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>n. (Alternatively<br />
be ready to cover <strong>the</strong> board with paper or a cloth).<br />
When all <strong>the</strong> words have been written down, give <strong>the</strong> students a moment to look at<br />
<strong>the</strong>m and <strong>the</strong>n erase <strong>the</strong>m. Each student <strong>the</strong>n tries to remember all <strong>the</strong> words and to<br />
write <strong>the</strong>m down. After five minutes ask <strong>the</strong> students to work with <strong>the</strong>ir neighbor and to<br />
compile a joint list. After ano<strong>the</strong>r five minutes ask pairs <strong>of</strong> students to work toge<strong>the</strong>r in<br />
groups <strong>of</strong> four to compile <strong>the</strong>ir final composite list. Tell <strong>the</strong> students to put <strong>the</strong>ir words<br />
into alphabetical order. See which group remembers <strong>the</strong> most words.<br />
Listening comprehension<br />
Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> variety and complexity <strong>of</strong> information in <strong>the</strong> wall<br />
picture mean that students must listen or read very carefully in order to identify what is<br />
being referred to.<br />
The teacher describes: 1 a person's appearance in <strong>the</strong> picture 2 a person's thoughts 3<br />
an object 4 what <strong>the</strong> teacher thinks about anything in <strong>the</strong> picture. The students try to<br />
say who or what is being described. The description can be easy both conceptually and<br />
linguistically or be very demanding in both senses. Here is a description intended for<br />
beginners:<br />
TEACHER: He is thinking. I must go slowly. It's dangerous/<br />
STUDENT A: The man on <strong>the</strong> motorbike.<br />
TEACHER: Yes.<br />
A more demanding example:<br />
TEACHER: What a wonderful quiet place to retreat to in <strong>the</strong> lunch break.<br />
STUDENT B: The Park.<br />
TEACHER: Yes.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 123
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Free communicative practice<br />
Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> variety and complexity <strong>of</strong> information <strong>of</strong>fers<br />
considerable choice <strong>of</strong> what to talk about.<br />
Speculation<br />
With <strong>the</strong> wallpicture made <strong>of</strong> magazine pictures-<strong>of</strong> animals (page 44), <strong>the</strong> students<br />
could be asked to identify <strong>the</strong> animals, to say where <strong>the</strong>y live and lo talk about <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
characteristics. The students can <strong>the</strong>n he asked to discuss broader issues such as, '<strong>the</strong><br />
relationship between <strong>the</strong>se animals and people', 'animal rights', animals' in history', and<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir own personal associations with <strong>the</strong>se animals.<br />
Story - telling<br />
In <strong>the</strong> picture <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> street scene (page 44) <strong>the</strong>re is a great variety <strong>of</strong> information which<br />
could provide a basis for story-telling. Students rnight be asked to imagine what one <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> people is thinking or feeling and to write a short story about him nr her. The story<br />
could include reference to several places or o<strong>the</strong>r people in <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />
Technical tips<br />
1. The students al <strong>the</strong> back <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class must be able to see and recognize <strong>the</strong> details<br />
that you want <strong>the</strong>m to see. The only way to ensure this happens is to test it. As a<br />
general rule details must be about 2 cm in height to be seen <strong>the</strong> length <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
classroom. Never<strong>the</strong>less, testing is <strong>the</strong> only way <strong>of</strong> being sure.<br />
2. Teachers and students can make wallpictures by drawing <strong>the</strong>m and/or by sticking<br />
pictures from magazines, etc. on to <strong>the</strong> paper. Although <strong>the</strong> result is, by definition,<br />
amateurish <strong>the</strong> students are very likely to appreciate it as much or more than a<br />
commercially produced picture.<br />
3. The drawing style used must be almost diagrammatic with clear, simple outlines and<br />
simple colour - filled shapes ra<strong>the</strong>r than a sketchy, impressionistic style which is difficult<br />
to read.<br />
4. The easiest way to store wallpictures is o fold <strong>the</strong>m neatly, unless you have access<br />
to a map rack or shell.<br />
5. For more suggestions for drawing, mounting and displaying wallpictures<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 124
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Picture flash cards<br />
Picture flash cards are pictures mounted or drawn on cards approximately 15 cm by 20<br />
cm. They are normally used by <strong>the</strong> teacher in oral work for cueing responses to<br />
questions or in more open communicative work for stimulating conversation, storytelling,<br />
etc. The normal picture card has a picture on one side only. However, both<br />
sides can be used and <strong>the</strong> card can be folded or cut to various ways with particular<br />
<strong>teaching</strong> purposes in mind.<br />
Characteristics and techniques<br />
1. Picture cards are easy and inexpensive for <strong>the</strong> teacher lo prepare which means<br />
that sets <strong>of</strong> cards related to <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> points nr lo subject matter can<br />
be built up over a period <strong>of</strong> time.<br />
2. The cards are easy to store and to carry to <strong>the</strong> classroom so <strong>the</strong>y <strong>of</strong>fer<br />
considerable flexibility to <strong>the</strong> teacher in <strong>the</strong> conduct <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />
3. The cards can be shown to <strong>the</strong> whole class nr (o a single student which allows<br />
<strong>the</strong> teacher to control who receives <strong>the</strong> information on <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
4. Because <strong>the</strong>y hey are held and can be presented at speed or in a leisurely<br />
manner, <strong>the</strong> teacher can control <strong>the</strong> pace, variety and interest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />
5. The teacher can show one or two cards al any one lime by hand. However, <strong>the</strong><br />
cards can also be propped on a shelf, for example, at, <strong>the</strong> bottom <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
chalkboard. The cards can also be pinned on a board, or stuck to a<br />
magnetboard or to any smooth surface with adhesive plastic. The student can<br />
be asked to stand at <strong>the</strong> front <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class and to hold cards. In this way a great<br />
number <strong>of</strong> cards can be displayed.<br />
6. The cards are used in group work by <strong>the</strong> students.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 125
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Presentation<br />
Characteristic and techniques; <strong>the</strong>re is great flexibility in being able to show one or<br />
several picture cards at key moments.<br />
Teaching meaning with one picture<br />
Sometimes it is possible to show a single picture illustrating a new word and expect it<br />
to be understood. For example, a bicycle:<br />
Teaching meaning using several pictures<br />
Usually it is advisable to show several pictures to be sure that <strong>the</strong> students know what<br />
you are referring to. For example, in <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>the</strong> present perfect continuous: He has<br />
been swimming. She's been climbing. They’ve been eating. These cards can be shown<br />
to <strong>the</strong> class and <strong>the</strong>n propped on a shelf, each reinforcing <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />
Contrasting meanings<br />
Sometimes it is helpful to introduce contrasting <strong>language</strong> items at <strong>the</strong> same time. The<br />
two pictures can be placed on ei<strong>the</strong>r side <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> card. In <strong>the</strong> act <strong>of</strong> turning <strong>the</strong> card over<br />
<strong>the</strong> contrast is demonstrated. The examples given below are: can/can’t likes/doesn't.<br />
like, too big/too small:<br />
Comparing meanings<br />
Card can also be folded. In <strong>the</strong> example below, <strong>the</strong> difference between *hill' and<br />
'mountain' is demonstrated. Each one may be seen by itself or in comparison with <strong>the</strong><br />
o<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 126
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Presenting meanings <strong>of</strong> new words in a story<br />
Sometimes it is essential to introduce <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> within a longer text, perhaps a<br />
story. The <strong>language</strong> which is already known to <strong>the</strong> student leads to an understanding <strong>of</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> story and Ibis understanding <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story indicates <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new<br />
<strong>language</strong>. Picture cards can be used to illustrate <strong>the</strong> story and by making <strong>the</strong> story<br />
more readily understood, <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>, in turn, might be understood by <strong>the</strong><br />
student. It is important to say 'might he' because it is <strong>of</strong>ten difficult to ascertain just how<br />
people have responded to and interpreted <strong>the</strong> information <strong>the</strong>y have received.<br />
Folding card story<br />
A miniature story is created simply by folding <strong>the</strong> paper. By folding <strong>the</strong> paper into three<br />
panels, three stages in <strong>the</strong> story can be illustrated and this, in turn, illustrates three<br />
tense forms.<br />
He's going to sit on <strong>the</strong> cat. He's sitting on <strong>the</strong> cat. He has sat on <strong>the</strong> cat.<br />
Note: If you show one exam pie <strong>of</strong> this three fold story, you could ask <strong>the</strong> students to<br />
produce one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir own for homework. Although it would only involve <strong>the</strong>m in dealing<br />
with one example <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se three tense forms, it would never<strong>the</strong>less he very intensive<br />
and memorable. They would also be able to show <strong>the</strong>ir work to <strong>the</strong>ir fellow students<br />
and more practice would occur.<br />
Practice<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 127
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Characteristics and techniques: a great variety <strong>of</strong> pictures can be shown at a moment’s<br />
notice to <strong>the</strong> student’s one after <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r nr <strong>the</strong> cards can be placed un a shelf. The<br />
pictures can provide reference for <strong>the</strong> students as <strong>the</strong>y answer nr ask questions, make<br />
substitutions or complete sentences.<br />
TEACHER; (holding op a picture <strong>of</strong> some apples) I’ve been to <strong>the</strong> shops. What did I<br />
buy?<br />
STUDENT: You bought some apples.<br />
Alternatively, don't show <strong>the</strong> picture to <strong>the</strong> students, so that <strong>the</strong>y must guess what you<br />
have bought. The <strong>language</strong> practice <strong>the</strong> same but <strong>the</strong> interest is greater and <strong>language</strong><br />
is used more meaningfully.<br />
Pictures and sentence patterns<br />
The teacher might wish lo write a sentence model table on <strong>the</strong> board to guide <strong>the</strong><br />
students and <strong>the</strong>n use picture flash cards to cue variations. Usually this kind <strong>of</strong> work<br />
requires <strong>the</strong> student to think very little about <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> what he or she is saying. It<br />
is possible, however, Lo plan <strong>the</strong> activity so that <strong>the</strong> student must give more thought lo<br />
meaning before speaking. In <strong>the</strong> example below, <strong>the</strong> student has a choice <strong>of</strong> what to<br />
say based on his or her general knowledge. The teacher writes <strong>the</strong> model on <strong>the</strong><br />
board.<br />
TEACHER: (showing a picture <strong>of</strong> a horse and pointing a student) what about horses,<br />
Edwina? - -<br />
STUDENT: Horses can jump but <strong>the</strong>y can’t fly.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 128
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Expressing personal preferences<br />
The examples above provide a certain amount <strong>of</strong> practice in <strong>the</strong> manipulation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>language</strong> and <strong>the</strong>y do demand some attention to <strong>the</strong> meaning. However, such practice<br />
is, by its nature, remote from <strong>the</strong> way <strong>language</strong> is used for real purposes. After ah <strong>the</strong><br />
teacher knows very well that horses can jump but not fly! So why should <strong>the</strong> student<br />
say this? Simple practice <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> points can <strong>of</strong>ten be achieved with a closer<br />
approximation to <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> in order to communicate an idea. In <strong>the</strong> example<br />
below, <strong>the</strong> student is practicing <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> 'would' but, at <strong>the</strong> same time, expressing his<br />
or her own preferences which <strong>the</strong> teacher could not have predicted. In this sense <strong>the</strong><br />
student is telling <strong>the</strong> teacher something he or she did not know. A simple practice<br />
exercise is thus being used for real communicative purposes.<br />
Two basic sentence should be written on <strong>the</strong> board I would prefer <strong>the</strong> orange.<br />
I don't like ei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m<br />
TEACHER: (showing two pictures <strong>of</strong> fruit) which would you prefer, or perhaps you don't<br />
like ei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m?<br />
STUDENT: I would prefer <strong>the</strong> people<br />
TEACHER: Fine<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 129
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Note: Because <strong>the</strong> student is being asked to give genuine response, it is only natural<br />
that you should respond to what he or she says in some way, even it is only to smile<br />
and to say, 'fine', “good”, “right', etc.<br />
Mini role plays cued by pictures<br />
In <strong>the</strong> above example <strong>the</strong> students are being asked to express <strong>the</strong>ir preferences.<br />
Pictures provide one way <strong>of</strong> stimulating and giving reference to such "mini' but real<br />
conversations. An alternative ¡s to have mini role plays in which <strong>the</strong> students pretend to<br />
be a character. What <strong>the</strong> students say is cued by <strong>the</strong> picture and might be in response<br />
to what is said to <strong>the</strong>m. The teacher or ano<strong>the</strong>r student might provide The o<strong>the</strong>r role.<br />
TEACHER: What are you doing this evening, Roger? (asking <strong>the</strong> question and <strong>the</strong>n<br />
showing a picture <strong>of</strong> a basketball match)<br />
STUDENT: I'm going to a basketball match.<br />
TEACHER: That's great! /how interesting/Ra<strong>the</strong>r you than me!<br />
The slow picture reveal<br />
The card can be put in an envelope and <strong>the</strong>n withdraw a centimeter at a time. As <strong>the</strong><br />
students see more <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> picture ask <strong>the</strong>m lo try lo identify what <strong>the</strong>y can see and to<br />
predict what might appear next in <strong>the</strong> picture. This gives guided practice in <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong><br />
descriptive <strong>language</strong>.<br />
Open communicative practice<br />
Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> cards can be juxtaposed rapidly.<br />
Imagining connections<br />
Show <strong>the</strong> students any two picture cards toge<strong>the</strong>r and ask <strong>the</strong>m to imagine a<br />
connection between <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 130
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
STUDENT: This man is driving home very quickly because he is hungry and wants his<br />
dinner.<br />
Story connections<br />
The example above can be extended into a story with each part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story cued by<br />
<strong>the</strong> next picture (chosen at random). The picture can be propped up on a shelf.<br />
Alternatively, <strong>the</strong>y can be kept in <strong>the</strong> teacher's hand, in order. Each student who adds a<br />
sentence to <strong>the</strong> story must retell <strong>the</strong> story so far, cued by <strong>the</strong> pictures. Here is a<br />
example.<br />
The man was driving home very quickly because he was hungry and wanted his<br />
dinner. He thought about his difficult job and he wished he could live on a desert island.<br />
He remembered his old friend Bill <strong>the</strong> Knife. He remembered that Bill loved ice cream.<br />
Suddenly he saw a dog in <strong>the</strong> road.<br />
An alternative to <strong>the</strong> above example is to show <strong>the</strong> pictures Lo <strong>the</strong> students and to ask<br />
<strong>the</strong>m to write for fur minutes about each one. Insist that <strong>the</strong> writing links toge<strong>the</strong>r as<br />
one story. At <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> time four minutes <strong>the</strong> students should take it in turns to read<br />
out <strong>the</strong>ir story Lo <strong>the</strong>ir neighbors. Ask one or two students to read out <strong>the</strong>ir story to <strong>the</strong><br />
class as a whole.<br />
Flashing a picture<br />
Flash a picture card at <strong>the</strong> class at great speed and ask <strong>the</strong> students what <strong>the</strong>y saw.<br />
Some will say <strong>the</strong>y saw nothing, o<strong>the</strong>rs will, amazingly, have seen something.<br />
Encourage differences <strong>of</strong> opinion and do not confirm or deny any ideas. Flash <strong>the</strong><br />
picture again and ask <strong>the</strong> students to tell each o<strong>the</strong>r what <strong>the</strong>y think <strong>the</strong>y saw. Continue<br />
flashing, encouraging differences and debate. Finally show time picture.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 131
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Technical tips<br />
1. The pictures must be clear enough to be seen <strong>the</strong> length <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> classroom and at<br />
some speed. Magazine photographs may sometimes be too complicated and full <strong>of</strong><br />
irrelevant detail. One way <strong>of</strong> reducing <strong>the</strong> distracting detail is to cut away <strong>the</strong><br />
background leaving <strong>the</strong> main shape.<br />
2. Line drawings should be simple and not sketchy. The lines should he quite thick, <strong>the</strong><br />
shape should be as suggestive <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> object as possible.<br />
3. Colour should be used to make <strong>the</strong> shape stand out clearly and to contribute to<br />
recognition; for example, orange for an orange, yellow for a lemon. Sometimes colour<br />
can be used to draw attention to a small shape in <strong>the</strong> picture, for example, a small<br />
present; <strong>the</strong> rest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> picture can be drawn with black lines and <strong>the</strong> present can be<br />
brightly colored. Just using colors for decorative purposes is probably a mistake in<br />
<strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>.<br />
4. Card is expensive. Sometimes cheap ‘cuts' can be obtained free from a local printer.<br />
O<strong>the</strong>rwise use food packets or cut up cardboard boxes.<br />
Word flash cards<br />
Word flash cards are usually about 8 cm in height and are as long as is necessary for<br />
<strong>the</strong> text. They are principality, though not exclusively, used in <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>of</strong> reading<br />
and writings.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 132
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Characteristics and techniques<br />
1. Word flash cards are easy and inexpensive for <strong>the</strong> teacher to prepare<br />
2. The cards are easy lo store and to carry to <strong>the</strong> classroom.<br />
3. They are easy for <strong>the</strong> teacher and <strong>the</strong> student's to handle and to use at <strong>the</strong><br />
appropriate moment They can be head, propped, or stuck to <strong>the</strong> board A<br />
number <strong>of</strong> cards can be displayed al <strong>the</strong> same time: by asking several students<br />
to hold <strong>the</strong>m, by stitching <strong>the</strong>m to <strong>the</strong> board, by clipping <strong>the</strong>m to a wire (see<br />
technical tips page 118), by propping <strong>the</strong>m on a shelf, by using a sentence<br />
maker. (See technical tips page 64.)<br />
Presentation<br />
Characteristic and techniques <strong>the</strong> cards can be prepared by <strong>the</strong> teacher and or<br />
students and may be handled and <strong>the</strong> stuck on different surfaces with adhesive plastic,<br />
sticky tape, pins, etc.<br />
Labelling classroom objects<br />
A well-established way <strong>of</strong> using word cards is for <strong>the</strong> teacher to stick <strong>the</strong>m on objects in<br />
<strong>the</strong> classroom: <strong>the</strong> door, <strong>the</strong> cupboard, a window, a desk, etc. The intention is to<br />
familiarize <strong>the</strong> student with <strong>the</strong> written form <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> word.<br />
At <strong>the</strong> reading practice stage, a game could be played based on true/false in which <strong>the</strong><br />
teacher moves <strong>the</strong> cards around before <strong>the</strong> students come into <strong>the</strong> classroom. The<br />
students must spot which words are in <strong>the</strong> wrong place and move <strong>the</strong>m lo <strong>the</strong> correct<br />
place.<br />
Characteristics and techniques: strips <strong>of</strong> card or paper are easy and cheap to obtain<br />
and texts can readily be written on <strong>the</strong>m with markers.<br />
Dialogue sentence cards<br />
Cards can be made <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> sentences, which have become familiar to <strong>the</strong> students in a<br />
short dialogue or in a story. These sentences can be shown as <strong>the</strong> dialogue is being<br />
spoken and <strong>the</strong>n stuck on <strong>the</strong> board or held by students. This stage <strong>of</strong> recognition<br />
reading is modest to what it <strong>of</strong>fers.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 133
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
However, it is a well-tried technique and is particularly helpful to those students who<br />
are not only <strong>learning</strong> to read a foreign <strong>language</strong> but one with a different script. Reading<br />
practice<br />
Command cards<br />
Ano<strong>the</strong>r will established use <strong>of</strong> word cards "commands" Commands are written on <strong>the</strong><br />
cards; <strong>the</strong> teacher show a card to student and <strong>the</strong> student carries out <strong>the</strong> command.<br />
The usual commands are open <strong>the</strong> door etc.<br />
However, ore amusing commands could be added to <strong>the</strong> collection. For example;<br />
Writing Practice<br />
Characteristics and techniques; <strong>the</strong> ease and sped <strong>of</strong> selecting displaying word and<br />
many combination.<br />
Class sentences<br />
Word cards allow <strong>the</strong> teacher and class to build sentences and to experiment with <strong>the</strong><br />
addition, <strong>the</strong> substitution and <strong>the</strong> subtraction <strong>of</strong> words within a sentence. The physical<br />
manipulation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> words can contribute enormously to an understanding <strong>of</strong> sentence<br />
construction by some students. (A variety <strong>of</strong> ways <strong>of</strong> <strong>learning</strong> should be <strong>of</strong>fered to <strong>the</strong><br />
class to mach <strong>the</strong> variety <strong>of</strong> wals in witch individual student need to learn<br />
In <strong>the</strong> first example, successive students take a card, read it out to <strong>the</strong> class and <strong>the</strong>n<br />
with <strong>the</strong> help <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class decide were <strong>the</strong>y should stand in <strong>the</strong> sentence.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> second example, <strong>the</strong> teachers ask <strong>the</strong> students to arrange <strong>the</strong> cards on <strong>the</strong><br />
[Escribir texto] Página 134
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
boars to make a sentence. Here one sentence is truck on <strong>the</strong> board and ano<strong>the</strong>r in<br />
propped on <strong>the</strong> self at <strong>the</strong> button <strong>the</strong> board.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> third example, <strong>the</strong> teacher gives a group <strong>of</strong> students a set <strong>of</strong> word cards and<br />
asks <strong>the</strong>m to stand in alphabetical order.<br />
Listening<br />
Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> cards are easy and quick to make. They can be<br />
displayed at <strong>the</strong> most appropriate moment without technical difficulty.<br />
Spot <strong>the</strong> word<br />
The teacher reads or tells a story and <strong>the</strong> individual students hold up <strong>the</strong>ir cards as<br />
<strong>the</strong>y hear <strong>the</strong>ir word spoken. This is training in intensive listening. The students are<br />
<strong>learning</strong> how to concentrate on one word or phrase and to ignore <strong>the</strong> rest. The word<br />
might be selected by <strong>the</strong> teacher to rein force a <strong>the</strong>me in <strong>the</strong> subject matter or in <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>language</strong> being used. For example <strong>the</strong> students may have word cards representing <strong>the</strong><br />
various ways in witch narration can be.<br />
Connected; suddenly <strong>the</strong>n next a few moments later meanwhile just at that moment<br />
just before. Each student can be asked to not down how many times his or her word<br />
phrase is used. The frequency <strong>of</strong> use and <strong>the</strong> role <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> word can <strong>the</strong>n be discussed<br />
after <strong>the</strong> story.<br />
Summarizing a talk<br />
Card witch summarize key point in talk are most helpful in attracting <strong>the</strong> interest<br />
structuring <strong>the</strong> talk. They are use in drawing attention to key points, in giving variety<br />
and interest in <strong>the</strong> talk, in acting as reminders <strong>of</strong> with <strong>the</strong> talk Was about once it is over<br />
and in providing a reference for discussion.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 135
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
Teacher (or student) might find this used <strong>of</strong> word cards helpful in reminding <strong>the</strong>m <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
order <strong>of</strong> points <strong>the</strong>y have planned to make. And it also helps <strong>the</strong> listener to understand<br />
<strong>the</strong> general argument <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> talk and not to get lost<br />
The card can be hells up, pinned to s<strong>of</strong>t board, stuck to <strong>the</strong> board with adhesive plastic,<br />
or propped along <strong>the</strong> black board shelf.<br />
An example <strong>of</strong> set <strong>of</strong> key point for a talk might be:<br />
The same technique can also he used in story telling. Each key creature or object can<br />
he named no a card:<br />
Technical tips<br />
1. Although card is stiffer and more durable than paper, paper strips are quite<br />
adequate.<br />
2. Printers throw away enormous quantities <strong>of</strong> '<strong>of</strong>fcuts'. These are <strong>the</strong> strips <strong>of</strong> paper<br />
cut <strong>of</strong>f <strong>the</strong> ends <strong>of</strong> printed sheets.<br />
3. An alternative to producing individual cards is to have a number <strong>of</strong> standard length<br />
cards which are covered in a self - adhesive plastic. A water-based overhead<br />
projector pen can <strong>the</strong>n be used to write words, which can he wiped <strong>of</strong>f later once<br />
<strong>the</strong> activity is over.<br />
4. To establish a minimum height for <strong>the</strong> letters, try one out!. That is <strong>the</strong> best way.<br />
However, <strong>the</strong> general guidance is that, letters should be about 6 cm high to be<br />
seen 10 m away.<br />
5. Words composed solely <strong>of</strong> CAPITAL LETTERS are more difficult to read than those<br />
in upper and lower case letters. We recognize words partly by <strong>the</strong>ir overall shape.<br />
Words made <strong>of</strong> capital letters all look <strong>the</strong> same shape, i. e rectangular.<br />
6. Ways <strong>of</strong> displaying word cards have been referred to above. A class display<br />
sentence maker can be made as follows:<br />
A large sheet <strong>of</strong> paper is folded as shown above and <strong>the</strong>n staple onto card or<br />
hardboard.<br />
Au<strong>the</strong>ntic printed materials include anything written and printed in English:<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 136
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
newspapers, magazines, publicity, technical instructions for equipment, holiday<br />
brochures, etc.<br />
Characteristic and techniques<br />
1. Very <strong>of</strong>ten, free material is available to <strong>the</strong> teacher.<br />
2. The fact that it is au<strong>the</strong>ntic material clearly not produced for schools means that<br />
students are <strong>of</strong>ten motivated by it and curious.<br />
3. The complexity <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> is a disadvantage only if you expect <strong>the</strong> students to<br />
understand every word. It is not <strong>the</strong> difficulty <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> text, which determines which<br />
pr<strong>of</strong>iciency level <strong>of</strong> students, can use <strong>the</strong> text, hut <strong>the</strong> task you give <strong>the</strong>m to do. For<br />
example, you could give a newspaper article to a first year group <strong>of</strong> students and<br />
ask <strong>the</strong>m to find how many words <strong>the</strong>y can recognize. Thus one should be<br />
exploiting <strong>the</strong> complexity <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> material and showing students that <strong>the</strong>y can <strong>of</strong>ten<br />
make some sense even <strong>of</strong> difficult material if <strong>the</strong>y look for every possible clue. The<br />
material should not be used for testing comprehension but for <strong>teaching</strong><br />
comprehension, which means developing a positive and confident attitude to it and<br />
<strong>learning</strong> some basic techniques for dealing with a lot <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong>, which is difficult<br />
to understand.<br />
4. The material can usually be photocopied and <strong>the</strong>n stuck onto card for reuse.<br />
5. The material is <strong>of</strong>ten much more expensively produced than educational books<br />
available to teachers in many countries.<br />
Newspapers<br />
Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> very fact that <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>of</strong> newspapers is<br />
difficult to read is one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> reasons for using <strong>the</strong>m. Students must experience <strong>the</strong> flow<br />
<strong>of</strong> native <strong>language</strong> use and know how to do <strong>the</strong>ir best with it.<br />
The topicality <strong>of</strong> newspapers is relevant and so too is <strong>the</strong> reflection <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> culture. Here<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 137
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
are a few things you can do with most newspapers.<br />
With your beginners:<br />
1. Ask <strong>the</strong>m to list all <strong>the</strong> words <strong>the</strong>y recognize.<br />
DOZENS <strong>of</strong> pensioners have been left Out<br />
in <strong>the</strong> cold as pans to move into Luxury<br />
retirement flats have fallen through at <strong>the</strong><br />
last minute.<br />
Wimpey Homes Hoidngs Ltd.. Opened<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir recently-completed Park field Court<br />
development in Didsbury two months ago<br />
for a public viewing.<br />
2. Ask <strong>the</strong>m lo guess what each article is about ei<strong>the</strong>r broadly, for example, sport<br />
answer to you question she or more specifically, for example, <strong>the</strong> London marathon.<br />
3. Ask <strong>the</strong>m to identify <strong>the</strong> different section <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> newspaper: <strong>the</strong> main news, <strong>the</strong><br />
editorial, general features sport, business, advertisement, etc.<br />
With more advanced students:<br />
1. Prepare some questions based on different Paris <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> newspaper, which do not<br />
entail <strong>the</strong> students reading everything in <strong>the</strong> tail but only in searching for <strong>the</strong><br />
answers to your questions. (Advances students could be asked Lo prepare <strong>the</strong><br />
questions for less advanced students.) For example:<br />
• How much does <strong>the</strong> 987 Ford Granada cost and how many miles has it done?<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 138
UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />
Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />
English Language Career<br />
• What time is Gone With <strong>the</strong> Windom <strong>the</strong> television?<br />
• Who Lost <strong>the</strong>ir cat?<br />
• What did Sarah Raphael say when her pain ting was sold to <strong>the</strong> Metropolitan<br />
Museum <strong>of</strong> Modern Art in New York?<br />
2. Give <strong>the</strong> students advertisements from a newspaper showing prices <strong>of</strong>, for<br />
example, houses, cars, TVs, etc. and advertisements for jobs showing salaries.<br />
Ask questions such as:<br />
• How much do things cost in Britain (or <strong>the</strong> country <strong>of</strong> origin <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> newspaper)?<br />
• How do <strong>the</strong>se prices relate to what people earn, judging by <strong>the</strong> advertisements for<br />
jobs?<br />
• How do <strong>the</strong>se prices and incomes relate to those ill your own country?<br />
3. Cut out several headlines and ask <strong>the</strong> students to discuss what <strong>the</strong> article might he<br />
about. This is a good way <strong>of</strong> developing predictive reading skills.<br />
4. Cut out several headlines and articles and ask <strong>the</strong> student to match <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
5. Cut ant several photographs and <strong>the</strong>ir Captions separately. Ask <strong>the</strong> student's to<br />
match <strong>the</strong>m. Ono approach lo this technique is give a photograph to a pair <strong>of</strong> students<br />
and to ask <strong>the</strong>m to note down as much as <strong>the</strong>y can surmise from a study <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />
They should <strong>the</strong>n write a short article or caption to go with it before being shown <strong>the</strong><br />
actual one used.<br />
6. Cut up an article into several pieces and ask <strong>the</strong> students to sequence <strong>the</strong> pieces<br />
correctly. This can be done in various ways. In one version <strong>the</strong> class is divided in to<br />
small groups and each is given one section <strong>of</strong> an article. They study it and try to make<br />
sense <strong>of</strong> it. Then <strong>the</strong> teacher asks each group to read out <strong>the</strong>ir piece <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> article. The<br />
groups make notes un <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r pieces <strong>the</strong>y hear and try to decide what order <strong>the</strong>y<br />
should be in. Next <strong>the</strong>re is a class discussion. The pieces can be read and re-read until<br />
everyone is in agreement. Finally <strong>the</strong> whole article is read out.<br />
[Escribir texto] Página 139